SlideShare a Scribd company logo
2010
Automation Spring/Wire Form
               Assembly Line
                Working Plan




                   Project Managers:
                   Lydia Ross
                   Hector Rodriguez
                   Automotive Parts, Inc
                   Master Capstone Project
                   Keller School of Management
                   6/16/2010
Contents
1     Executive Summary ...............................................................................................................................................6
    1.1       Project Baseline ............................................................................................................................................6
    1.2       Project Variance ...........................................................................................................................................8
    1.3       Project Expansion .........................................................................................................................................8
2     Technical Proposal ................................................................................................................................................9
    2.1       Project Purpose ............................................................................................................................................9
      2.1.1       Background ..............................................................................................................................................9
      2.1.2       The Need ..................................................................................................................................................9
      2.1.3       Objectives and Goals .............................................................................................................................10
    2.2       Project Benefits ..........................................................................................................................................10
      2.2.1       Stakeholders ..........................................................................................................................................10
      2.2.2       Benefits ..................................................................................................................................................11
    2.3       Statement of work .....................................................................................................................................12
      2.3.1       Project Summary ...................................................................................................................................12
      2.3.2       Scope .....................................................................................................................................................12
      2.3.3       Phases and Milestones ..........................................................................................................................12
      2.3.4       Schedule of Rates - Labor ......................................................................................................................13
      2.3.5       Equipment and Materials ......................................................................................................................13
      2.3.6       General Administration, Contingency, Others .......................................................................................14
      2.3.7       Summary of Total Cost ...........................................................................................................................14
      2.3.8       Payment terms.......................................................................................................................................15
      2.3.9       Statement of work – Assumptions.........................................................................................................16
      2.3.10          Change Management Process ...........................................................................................................17
      2.3.11          Engagement Related Expenses..........................................................................................................17
      2.3.12          Acceptance and authorization...........................................................................................................18
    2.4       Project Plan ................................................................................................................................................19
      2.4.1       Technical Description of New System ....................................................................................................19
      2.4.2       Facility Design and Simulation ...............................................................................................................20
      2.4.3       Future Process .......................................................................................................................................20
      2.4.4       Detailed Project Schedule - Modified ....................................................................................................21
      2.4.5       Specific Challenges .................................................................................................................................22
      2.4.6       Risk Management Matrix .......................................................................................................................22
      2.4.7       Top Risk Recommended Action Plans ....................................................................................................24
    2.5       Project Completion Plan.............................................................................................................................27
      2.5.1       Deliverables ...........................................................................................................................................27



                                                                                                                                                            2|Page
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
2.5.2       Acceptance Test ....................................................................................................................................28
      2.5.3       Acceptance Sign-off Cart........................................................................................................................29
3     Management Proposal ........................................................................................................................................30
    3.1       Corporate Organizational Structure ...........................................................................................................30
      3.1.1       Corporate Roles and Responsibilities ....................................................................................................31
    3.2       Project Organizational plan ........................................................................................................................34
      3.2.1       Work Breakdown Structure ...................................................................................................................34
      3.2.2       Project Organizational Structure ...........................................................................................................35
      3.2.3       Project Team ..........................................................................................................................................36
      3.2.4       Responsibility Matrix ............................................................................................................................38
4     Management Systems ........................................................................................................................................40
    4.1       Supplier, Selection and Management ........................................................................................................40
      4.1.1       Overview - Procurement of Automated Machines and Robots .............................................................40
      4.1.2       Production-Line Equipment Vendors .....................................................................................................41
      4.1.3       Computer Vendors.................................................................................................................................43
      4.1.4       Contract Close-Out ................................................................................................................................43
    4.2       Monitoring Cost and Schedule ...................................................................................................................44
      4.2.1       Overview ................................................................................................................................................44
      4.2.2       Labor Cost and Schedule........................................................................................................................45
      4.2.3       Major Equipment Cost and Schedule ....................................................................................................47
      4.2.4       Contingency, Administration and Others Cost ......................................................................................47
    4.3       Management of Scope and Change Orders ...............................................................................................48
      4.3.1       Overview ................................................................................................................................................48
      4.3.2       Development of Scope ...........................................................................................................................49
      4.3.3       Out-of-Scope Items ................................................................................................................................50
      4.3.4       Documentation of Change of Scope ......................................................................................................51
    4.4       Quality Management .................................................................................................................................52
      4.4.1       Overview ................................................................................................................................................52
      4.4.2       Work Package Identification ..................................................................................................................54
      4.4.3       Work Package Inputs, Process and Outputs ..........................................................................................55
      4.4.4       Determining Possible Defects ................................................................................................................56
      4.4.5       Prevention of Defects ............................................................................................................................56
      4.4.6       Indentification of Defects ......................................................................................................................58
5     Project Cost Estimate ..........................................................................................................................................61
    5.1       Project Cost ................................................................................................................................................61
      5.1.1       Total Project Cost ...................................................................................................................................61



                                                                                                                                                          3|Page
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
5.1.2       Breakdown of Project Costs ...................................................................................................................62
      5.1.3       Progress Payments.................................................................................................................................63
      5.1.4       Monthly Payment Distribution ..............................................................................................................64
      5.1.5       Earned Value Control ............................................................................................................................65
      5.1.6       Control Performance Index (CPI) & Schedule Performance Index (SPI) ................................................66
      5.1.7       Estimate at Completion (EAC) and Variance at Completion (VAC) ........................................................67
    5.2       Customer-Provide Resources .....................................................................................................................68
    5.3       Terms and Conditions ................................................................................................................................69
6     Unexpected Event ...............................................................................................................................................73
    6.1       Problem ......................................................................................................................................................73
      6.1.1       General Description ...............................................................................................................................73
      6.1.2       Current Status ........................................................................................................................................74
    6.2       Alternative Solutions ..................................................................................................................................79
      6.2.1       Overview ................................................................................................................................................79
      6.2.2       Continuing Contract ...............................................................................................................................79
      6.2.3       Contract Modification ............................................................................................................................79
      6.2.4       Pursuing another OEM...........................................................................................................................80
    6.3       Proposed Action .........................................................................................................................................80
7     Scope Expansion .................................................................................................................................................83
    7.1       Project Description .....................................................................................................................................83
    7.2       Initial Planning............................................................................................................................................85
    7.3       Scope ..........................................................................................................................................................87
    7.4       Schedule .....................................................................................................................................................89
    7.5       Budget ........................................................................................................................................................91
      7.5.1       Schedule of Rates - Labor ......................................................................................................................91
      7.5.2       Equipment and Materials ......................................................................................................................92
      7.5.3       General Administration, Contingency, Others .......................................................................................92
      7.5.4       Summary of Total Cost ...........................................................................................................................93
      7.5.5       WBS/ Cost Breakdown ...........................................................................................................................95
8     Appendixes .........................................................................................................................................................98
    8.1       Appendix A – Risk Assessment Matrix .......................................................................................................98
    8.2       Appendix B – Schedule of Rates ...............................................................................................................100
    8.3       Appendix C – Weekly Payments Progress ................................................................................................102
    8.4       Appendix D – Value Stream Maps ............................................................................................................103
    8.5       Appendix E – Change Request Form ........................................................................................................105
    8.6       Appendix F – Baseline Schedule ...............................................................................................................106



                                                                                                                                                             4|Page
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
8.7          Appendix G – Earned Value Analysis Week 14 .........................................................................................107
     8.8          Appendix H – Contract Close Out Checklist .............................................................................................108
     8.9          Appendix I ................................................................................................................................................112
9      Tables ................................................................................................................................................................115
10         Figures ..............................................................................................................................................................116
11     Works Cited .......................................................................................................................................................117




                                                                                                                                                                 5|Page
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
1 Executive Summary
1.1 Project Baseline
          Automated Parts Inc, (API) a coil spring, wire forming, subassembly automotive parts company is
          facing a lost in market share due to its inability to increase its production rate of manufactured
          parts while keeping competitive prices to customers. The company is currently stable with its
          current production but would like to increase market share with the coil spring and wire forms
          and increase production of value added parts. The value added parts will provide for a bigger
          profit margin. In order to meet these needs, API, Inc. as engaged its project management
          department to automate the coil spring, wire forming and welding equipment production lines.

          The automation of the production of parts and subassembly lines require the acquisition of new
          equipment, redesign of the production area, training of existing personnel, and in some cases the
          job placement of existing personnel in other organizations. The project management
          department has developed the team, planned the project, prepared the risk assessment and
          engaged engineering, procurement, finance and manufacturing to implement the plan. API as
          provided $2.5 million dollars for the entire plan which includes risk management and contingency
          plans and all cost associated with the project. The project is scheduled for a 43 week duration,
          starting on May 5th 2010. The Project is divided in four different phases:


                                                Table 1.1 Project Phases


                                        Phase                              Completion date
                                                                                   rd
                  1. Project Planning Phase                                   June 3 , 2010
      .           2.Manufacturing Design Phase- Execution
                                                                                        t
                                                                           September 7 , 2010
                                                                                        st
                  3.Procurement Phase-Execution                            December 21 , 2010
                                                                                   nd
                  4.Production/Validation Phase –Completion                  Marc 2 , 2011


          The project is defined in terms of quality that will increase production as well as make the
          production process more efficient in time, cost and the percentage of accurate first time
          production of parts. A team of 18 new skilled operators will be trained to operate the new
          equipment, while current labor consisting of 42 workers needs to be reassigned for future labor
          needs and placement. Figure No.1 describes the time, cost and accuracy rates the organization
          estimates it can achieve with the implementation of this project.




                                                                                                 6|Page
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
Figure 1.1: Process Performance Metrics (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)



                       Current Process                                                                         Future Process

                  Variable                               Measure                                    Variable                                       Measure


 Lead Production Time                            428 Minutes                               Lead Production Time                            <200 Minutes
                        1
 Value Added Time                                246 Minutes                               Value Added Time                                >150 Minutes

 Non-Value Added Time                            48 Minutes                                Non-Value Added Time                            0-10 Minutes

                                                                                           Inventory Time ( waiting Time)                  <50 Minutes
 Inventory Time ( waiting Time)                  134 Minutes
                                                                                           Takt Time (seconds/part)                        <20 seconds/part
 Takt Time (seconds/part)                        28.8 seconds/part

 First Time Quality :                            58%                                       First Time Quality :                            90%

 Change-Over time:                               60 Minutes                                Change-Over time:                               <30 Minutes



 Lead time: the time needed to complete an activity from start to finis
 Value Added Time: Activities that contributes to the production of final Product, transforms material and information
 Non-Value Added time: waste time, activities that does not add value to the final product. Activities creating no value but which cannot be eliminated
  based on current state of technology or thinking
 Inventory Time: waiting time to be process material, batch delays, and process delays.
 Takt Time : total time available for work time per day divided by customer-demand per day – sets the pace of production to match rate of demand
  Source: The Lean Memory Jogger, Richard L. Macinnes.




                      The new process will require automated equipment for the Wire Gauge Checking, Wire Forming
                      and Robotic Welding for an investment of $1,700,000. Turnkey installation service and
                      specialized training will be provided to our team of engineers and production operators by the
                      selected Vendor. The Automation of Spring and Wire Form assembly line will bring numerous
                      benefits to API including improvement in precision manufacturing of parts, flexible
                      manufacturing, better quality control systems, empowered employees, improvement in
                      ergonomics and safety in the operations, increase of production capacity, and reduction of Takt
                      time and reduction of production cost by a range of 20%. Finally the automation of the coil
                      spring/wire form production line will set the grounds for Lean Manufacturing and Just in Time
                      Inventory as future corporate projects. It also will set the ground for new product development
                      and more specialty sub-assembly products.

            1
                Value added operations are for example those operations which require some welding or subassembly



                                                                                                                                            7|Page
            Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
The success of the project is paramount to API, therefore risk management and contingency
          plans are in place to overcome every possible foreseeable problem.

1.2 Project Variance
          One problem that occurred during the working plan of the project was the vendor of the coil
          springs and wire forms equipment became financially unstable and was threatening bankruptcy.
          Since project management anticipated a possible financial concern during vendor selection, the
          next highest scored vendor’s proposal specifications and the first phase of contract negotiations
          had been conducted in case the first vendor was unable to fulfill the negotiated contract.
          Project management defined the risk scenarios and contingency plan to overcome the risk. The
          risk contingency plans that were developed due to the vendor’s financial dilemmas included the
          following:

            1. Stay with the vendor and receive the equipment without service or maintenance.
            2. Wait for Vendor to be taken over by another company and renegotiate the contract.
            3. Go with another OEM and continue with the project.
          Section 6 of this plan will describe all of the impacts of choosing one of the above scenarios. In
          order to maintain the integrity of the project in terms of time and cost the decision to pick
          another OEM was employed. In this scenario, the President of API, Owen French could stay with
          his initial goal of gaining more of the market share.

1.3 Project Expansion
          To achieve increased market share as quickly as possible, an expansion of the automation project
          was presented to project management which included new product development, as well as,
          acquiring consignment parts of subassemblies. Marketing research determined coil springs for
          military tanks, wire forms for NASA aerospace and subassemblies for the department of defense
          were new products developments the company would pursue. These new product
          developments will be launched in three separate timeframes during the project to ensure
          maximum efficiency and quality. Section 7.0 of this plan describes the expansion to the
          automation project.

                                              Table 1.2: Product Development Program


                                       Project                           Completion date
                                                                                 th
                  1. Wire Forms Aerospace                                   June 8 , 2011
      .           2.Coil for Tanks Defense
                                                                                      st
                                                                           August 1 , 2011
                                                                                       th
                  3.Subassemblies Defense                                 January 16 , 2012




                                                                                                 8|Page
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
2 Technical Proposal
2.1 Project Purpose
2.1.1 Background
         Automotive Parts Inc. (API) is a small manufacturer of coil springs and wire forms. API’s
         customers include suppliers of mechanical and electrical subassemblies to automobile, truck,
         over-the-road vehicle OEMs (Original Equipment Manufacturer) and the OEMs themselves.
         These types of customers include such clients as Dana, Arvin Meritor, Ford, GM and Toyota. API
         is providing coil springs, wire forms and subassemblies that include welded parts for these
         important clients. In order to provide better service to its clients, API also offers unique
         prototypes and fast turnaround of its coil springs and wire forms. The manufacturing process to
         produce the photo types, coil spring and wire forms require several steps.

          The manufacturing processes involved in producing springs and flexible wire forms are wire
         gauge checking, wire forming, and welding. Wire gage checking is a complex process which also
         includes inspections for imperfections in the wire. Other operations in the manufacturing
         process include the value added operations. Value added operations are those operations
         which require some welding or subassembly. For example, the ends of a formed-wire piece
         may be welded to a small metal base plate for screw-mounting within a vehicle, or for applying a
         spring’s force over a larger area to hold another part in place. Value-added operations
         represent bigger margin work than wire form and coil springs. Therefore the Company’s goal is
         to increase business in the value added operations area.



2.1.2 The Need
         The Company needs to get its cost in-line to stay competitive. Currently API is losing market
         share because of its inability to meet the prices of its major competitors. The aim is to automate
         the current manufacturing process of Wire Gauge checking, Wire formers and Welding. By
         automating these processes, API can produce parts much quicker as well as increase its capacity.

         The Company is prepared to spend $2.5 million for the automation project of its production
         lines. To achieve its goals, the company will buy automated equipment for Electronic Wire
         Gauge Checkers, Automated Wire Formers and Robotic Welders. In addition to the automated
         resources, there will be labor resources including 2 operators for the wire gauge checking
         operations, 10 operators for the wire forming operation and 4 operators for the robotic welding
         operation.




                                                                                               9|Page
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
2.1.3 Objectives and Goals
         The objectives of the Automation of the Coil/Springs production Line is to deliver better quality
         parts, with an updated production process that will make Automotive Parts, Inc more
         competitive in the market and increase its market share, while reducing production cost.

                                        Table 2.1: Goals & Objectives (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)

              Goals                           Objectives            Method                       Measures of Success
                                                              Invest in new
  Have top notch Production             Update Process        Electronic Wire Gauge       The Process in full operation with
  Facility for Springs and Wire         with Automated        Checkers, Automated         100% Installation and Start-up for
  Forms                                 Equipment             Wire Formers and            Production ready in 10 months
                                                              Robotic Welders
                                                              Study Current Process
  Become a Cost oriented
                                        Reduce                Check for Inefficiencies
  operation that contributes                                                              Reduce Production Cost by 20%
                                        Production Cost       and Cost Reduction
  to the profit margin
                                                              Opportunities
                                                                                          Decrease Takt Time
                                                              Increase Peak Capacity
   Produce the best Quality             Increase Quality                                  (time to process a part) from 28.8
                                                              as a strategic
  Products with high First              Increase                                          sec/piece to less than 20
                                                              advantage.
  Time Quality                          Production                                        seconds/piece
                                                              Trim down the Quality
  ( FTQ)                                Capacity                                          Raise First Time Quality (FTQ)
                                                              Inspection Process
                                                                                          from 58% to bigger tan 90%.
                                                              Release work force
  Have the most qualified,                                    from Mechanical
                                        Provide New                                       Increase the welding and value
  motivated and committed                                     Operations to include
                                        Value Added                                       added production throughput
  teams adding more value to                                  more value added
                                        Operations                                        between 25% an 50%.
  the Operation                                               operations – Ready to
                                                              Assemble Parts


2.2 Project Benefits
2.2.1 Stakeholders
         Figure 2.1 lists the most important stakeholders; we have divided them into external and
         internal suppliers or customers.

                                     Figure 2.1: Stakeholders (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)
                                External Suppliers
                                                                 External Customers
                                   Wire Supplier
                                                                   OEM’ Suppliers
                               Metal Parts Suppliers
                                                                       OEM’s
                           Other Parts in Consignment

                                                      Process
                                                Manufacturing Eng.
                                                   Product Eng.
                                                Quality / Production
                                                                 Internal Customers
                                Internal Suppliers             Operations Department
                          Human Resource Department             Finance Department
                             Purchasing Department              Sales and Marketing
                                                                    Department



                                                                                                        10 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
2.2.2 Benefits
                     The project benefits are classified in the five categories of the Global Manufacturing System
                     (GMS): People, Quality, Response Capacity, Cost and Environment

                                                 Figure 2.2: Benefits (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)




                                                              Response
   People                         Quality                                                        Cost             Environment
                                                              Capacity
                                                                                                                      1. Cleaner/Safer
                                                                                                                           working
    1. Increase                                                                                                      environment, less
                                                                                         1. Savings in the cost     lubricants, grease,
   Professional                                                   1. Increase
Development of the                                                                         of production by         production debris.
                                                             Production Volume                                       2. Use less energy
    labor force                  1. Improve FTQ for                Capacity                       20%
                                 production process                                                                      and fluids in
   2. Elevate the                                            2.Increase product              2. Opportunity              production
technical level of the               2. Increase                   Portfolio                Cost to product          3. Less noise and
    labor force                   productivity and           3. Add value added           more value added           distraction in the
                                  efficiency of the           components, and                    parts              production process
3. Add better paying                                                                     3. Motivate Wokers
                                  production line                 assemblies                                          4. Reduction of
        jobs                                                                             for Cost Reduction
                                                             4. Add Flexible Mfg.                                       Incidents and
    4. Increase                                                  Production                      Ideas                    Accidents
   Empowerment                                                                                                            5. Improve
                                                                                                                      Ergonomic and
                                                                                                                           Working
                                                                                                                        Environment
                                                                                                                          Conditions




                                                              HOW
                                                             The new Equipment
  The new assembly
                                                                  will increase
    line will require                                          productivity and
sophisticated , state                                        production capacity.
of the art automated           The new automated             The new equipment
   equipment, with                equipment will             will allow release of         Include automated         Implement a Lean
     better control,              contribute to a                                           equipment in the         and Clean flow of
                                                              the labor force to
  technical skills and            more stable and              add new added              wire gauge checking,      materials. Introduce
      management                precise production             value processes,             wire forming and          the automated
 decision. The labor           process giving better                                      welding production           equipment to
                                                                 increasing the
      force will be             quality of parts at a         product portfolio.          stations to decrease      reduce mechanical
 involved in this and            faster production            Develop a Flexible          production takt time          operations.
       future cost                      rate.                Operations design to
 reduction initiative                                        produce for a variety
with bonus pays per
                                                                  of parts and
   suggestion ideas.                                                volumes.




                                                                                                                  11 | P a g e
          Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
2.3 Statement of work
2.3.1 Project Summary
                                          Table 2.2: Project Description

                  Client/Vendor name                   Production Department

             Client/Vendor’s administrator             PMO
                                                       Automation of Spring/Wire Form
                      Project name
                                                       Production Line
                 Engagement duration                   43 Weeks
                                                             th
                        Begin date                     May 5 , 2010
                                                                  nd
                           End date                    March 2 , 2011


2.3.2 Scope
         The project will design, develop and implement the automation of the Springs and Wire Forms
         assembly line within a $2.5million budget in a 43 week period. The Project will include facility
         design, equipment and process design, procurement of new equipment, installation of
         equipment, accommodations of assembly line space, training and manufacturing validation of
         the new production assembly line. More details on the scope development will be explained on
         section 4.3.

2.3.3 Phases and Milestones
                      Table 2.3: Phases and Milestones (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)

      Pase                                                             Completion date
                                                                        Pase
                                                                               rd
      Project Planning Phase                                             June 3 , 2010
                                                                               rd
      Program Initiation                                                 June 3 , 2010
                                                                                         th
      Manufacturing Design Phase- Execution                        September 7 , 2010
                                                                                th
      Layout Design                                                     June 30 , 2010
                                                                               th
      Equipment Design                                                   July 14 , 2010
                                                                                nd
      Engineering Data Release                                          August 2 , 2010
                                                                                         st
      Procurement Phase-Execution                                 December 21 , 2010
                                                                                     st
      Purchase Orders                                             September 1 , 2010
                                                                                         st
      Equipment Development and Shipping                          December 21 , 2010
                                                                               nd
      Production/Validation Phase –Completion                          March 2 , 2011
                                                                                    st
      Installation of Equipment                                        January 26 , 2011
                                                                                nd
      Validation of Equipment                                           March 2 , 2011




                                                                                              12 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
2.3.4 Schedule of Rates - Labor
           Additional overtime hours are required for professional staff to account for action plan in procurement,
           engineering and installation of new equipment from Vendor B. See section 6 for more details. (Detailed
           information on each labor resource is provided in Appendix B).

                              Table 2.4: Schedule of Rates (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)
         Item description              Quantity          Avg.           Delivery             Cost             Cost
                                                      Rate/hour        schedule            Baseline         Baseline
                                                                      (Man - ours)                          Modified
                                                                              2
Professional Staff                        18           $29.14           7,417             $199,706         $216,141
(Engineers, Managers,
Supervisors)
Operations Staff                          16           $16.50            4,800            $79,233           $79,233
(Line Operators)
Current Operations Staff                  42           $15.42           12,600            $194,319         $194,319
( Line Operators, Inspectors)
Totals                                                                                   $473,258.58      $489,693.24




2.3.5 Equipment and Materials
           A 5% increase on price for new equipment: Wire Gauge Checkers and Wire Forming CNC, is to be added
           to the modified Baseline once the negotiations are revised with Vendor B. See section 6 for more details.
           (Detailed information on Equipment and Materials is provided in Appendix B).

                                   Table 2.5: Equipment Rates (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)

                                                           3               Cost                        Cost
    Item description        Quantity           Rate/unit
                                                                         Baseline                    Baseline
                                                                                                     Modified
Computer                       5                    $2,000.00                $10,000.00                  $10,000.00
Terminal
Wire Gauge                     2                  $ 150,000.00              $300,000.00                 $315,000.00
Checkers
Wire Forming CNC               5                  $ 210,000.00            $1,050,000.00                $1,102,500.00

Robotic Welders                2                  $ 205,000.00              $410,000.00                 $410,000.00


Totals                                                                       $1,770,000                  $1,837,500




2
 Delivery Schedule for Baseline was 6,290 hours not including additional hours for unexpected event (section 6)
3
  Rates/Units for modified baseline increased 5% for Wire Gauge Checkers ($157,500) and Wire Formers
($220,500)



                                                                                                         13 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
2.3.6 General Administration, Contingency, Others
                 Additional cost for trips, General Administration/Overhead are included as part of this project
                 only.


                                                Table 2.6: Other Costs (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)
                                Item Description                           Cost             Cost
                                                                         Baseline         Baseline
                                                                                         Modified
                                General Administration                  $109,123         109,123

                                Trips                                    $10,000         $10,000

                                Contingency                             $215,127         $131,191

                                Totals                                  $334,250         $250,314




        2.3.7 Summary of Total Cost
                 The total cost (modified) did not changed. All action plans cost to activate new Vendor B will be
                 absorbed by the Contingency Budget, hence reducing this contingency figure to $131,192.00
                 .(Detailed information on cost on Section 4)




Figure 2.3:Cost Distribution Chart (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)




                                                                       Table 2.7 : Summary Cost Structure (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)

                                                                                                              14 | P a g e
        Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
2.3.8 Payment terms
         No including contingency. Project Manager’s professional fees are prorated on the overall project.
         (Detailed information on Payments is provided in Appendix C)


                             Table 2.8: Payment Schedule (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)

                     Pase                       Completion date      Payments due         Payments due
                                                                        Baseline        Baseline Modified
                                                       rd
Project Planning Phase                           June 3 , 2010           $1,320              $1,320
                                                            th
Manufacturing Design Phase- Execution         September 7 , 2010        $48,845              $48,845

Procurement Phase-Execution                    December 21, 2010       $1,353,065          $1,419,573
                                                       nd
Operations/Validation Phase –Completion          Marc 2 , 2011          $781,228            $798,655




                                                                                                      15 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
2.3.9 Statement of work – Assumptions
                                                  Table 2.9: Assumptions (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)
          Product                     Operations/              Quality        uman Resources               IT              Management-
        Engineering                Production/Supply                                                                     Presidency/Finance
 Small to Mid-Size Springs       Intension to Keep New       Current First    Higher Tecnical          Current ERP        Top Management
 and Wire Forms Products            Production Rate,        Time Quality is   Labor Force will       System in place        Endorsement
                                    Desire to increase           58%           be demanded          for Material and
                                   Production Capacity                                                Cost control
      Material Sapes &            Current Operations 3      There are two      This is a Non-       DesignCAD/CAM       VSM Worksop Results
 Specifications: .004 inches       Shifts – 8 hours. The    Six Sigma Belts    Union Facility       systems in Place.   for improvement and
       to 2.0 inches in           two lines will produce                                                Simulation           opportunities
    diameter,round wire          simultaneously during                                                 Production
 ,square wire , rectangular              validation                                                 Systems in Place
  wire, special section wire
  Body Types open-coiled ,        Lead Average Time to      Will follow the         Future         New Computer,        The Project will Follow
helical shaped usually coiled     Produce One Part is 8      Quality Valve      Placement of       CNC systems will           the Global
 with a constant diameter,               hours              Review – Stage     Employees will          need to be        Development Plan of
     though they can be                                       Gate Plan          be required.        installed and          the Company
produced in hourglass, cone                                                       HR Plan is      callibrated. Added
      and barrel shapes                                                         required. Less     to the TPM plan
                                                                               labor force will
                                                                                 be required
Materials spring steel ,high       Current Production           Quality       Must keep some      New Equipment           Payments Plan for
  carbon steel, low carbon        Average is 3000 Parts      Inspection of    part of the labor   will be syncronize         Equipment
 steel , nickel plated carbon           per day              Production in     force for value       with Andon            25% @Deposit
steel, stainless alloys, non-                                    place              added             Production          25% @ Reception
   ferrous metals: elgiloy,                                                       operations            System            25% @ Validation
  astelloy, monel, inconel,                                                                                               25% @Installation
            Titanium
Presence of testing Lab with         No Space Layout        Will work along    Must identify
   Materials an Durability             Constraints           with Product      high and low
          Equipment                                         Engineering for     performers
                                                                Product
                                                             Validation on
                                                            new production
                                                              Equipment
                                 Equipmet Cost already                         higher paying
                                   includes Insurance                         rates will come
                                     and Freigt Cost                             after new
                                                                                equipment
                                                                              installation for
                                                                                 Operators
                                   Turnkey ( in-service)
                                 installation by supplier
                                  through validation of
                                        production
                                  New Automated and
                                      Development
                                    Equipment will be
                                  declared and covered
                                      by FloorShop
                                  Insurance Equipment
                                           Policy



                                                                                                                    16 | P a g e
           Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
2.3.10 Change Management Process

         The change management process will follow three internal procedures:

         1. Engineering/Process Change Notifications, release per engineering system
         2. Freeze Design Dates – Red Zone will be in the project Schedule to submit changes to the
            Project Council during the Red Zone Stage
         3. Scope Change – Any change in scope will be submitted to the PMO office and presented to
            the Project Council for approval

              For more detailed Change Management process refer to section 4.4



2.3.11 Engagement Related Expenses


           General Administration Expenses


         All payments and disbursement of money will be done through our Finance Department. All
         checks and bank transferred will need to be authorized and audited by our Finance department
         which will be the only entity authorized to release the funds. All Administration expenses will
         be accounted for in the Project Budget and will be released accordingly. Other departments may
         enter their cost, materials, resource request on our ERP (Enterprise Resource Planning) system
         for financial calculations and Finance approval and release.

           Payroll


         Payments of Payroll will be generated by the human Resource Department depending on the
         numbers of hours reported on the project. Finance will authorize and release payments for
         payroll purposes.

           Materials


         Material and Equipment payments will be generated by the Purchasing Department into the ERP
         system, and submitted for approval to Finance Department, which will be authorizing and
         releasing funds according to terms of payments agreed between Supplier and the Company.
         Any payment contract arrangements needs to be prepared and reviewed by the Purchasing
         Department and presented to the Finance Department for planning and provision purposes.




                                                                                            17 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
2.3.12 Acceptance and authorization



                   The terms and conditions of the Professional Services Agreement apply in full to the
                   services and products provided under this Statement of Work.

                   IN WITNESS WEREOF, the parties here to each acting with proper authority will
                   authorize the execution of this Statement of Work.




                 Full name                                             Full name



                 CEO – Automotive Parts, Inc                           Project Manager - PMO
                 Title                                                 Title




                 Signature                                             Signature




                 Date                                                  Date




                                                                                              18 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
2.4 Project Plan
2.4.1 Technical Description of New System
         API conducted a Value Stream Mapping workshop to identify the opportunities for improvement
         and to streamline the production of springs and wire forms.

         Current Process


         A SIPOC (Supplier, Inputs, Process, Output and Customer) depicts the current process and flow
         of materials and information. A more detailed Value Stream Map of the current System is
         shown on Appendix D. The Value Stream Map shows clearly where the inventory (waste) time
         is, and finds where the Wiring Gauging, Wire Forming and Welding stations become
         bottlenecks in the production process.


                               Figure 2.4: SIPOC Current Process (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)




                                                                                            19 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
2.4.2 Facility Design and Simulation
           In order to avoid future errors and rework, we will be using AutoCAD and other Simulation Tools
           to design the new shop floor and simulate the production flow with the new equipment in
           place. Both the old and the new assembly line will run simultaneously for the period of the
           Manufacturing Validation Build of the new assembly Line. After production is validated the old
           equipment needs to be sold or scrapped within six month of project completion (this activity is
           considered out of the scope of the project)

 2.4.3 Future Process
           The high Inventory time (waste) before wire inspection, wire forming and welding stations is
           creating bottlenecks, increasing the lead time of the production process. These three stations
           will be automated in order to increase throughput and production flow.

           To reduce the Lead Production Time and specially the Inventory Time and Changeover Time, the
           future process will incorporate three major automated equipments, which include CNC
           (Computer Numerical Control). These equipments will help release the inventory bottlenecks in
           the Gauge Checking, Wire Forming and Welding, making a more productive and efficient
           production flow.

           2Electronic Wire Gauge Checkers
           5Automated Wire Formers
           2Robotic Welders

                 Current and Future Value Stream Maps are shown in Appendix D. Figure 2.5
           summarizes the main metrics from Current and Future Process.



           Current Process                                                        Future Process

           Variable                            Measure                           Variable               Measure


Lead Production Time                  428 Minutes                 Lead Production Time                 <200 Minutes

Value Added Time                      246 Minutes                 Value Added Time                     >150 Minutes

Non-Value Added Time                  48 Minutes                  Non-Value Added Time                 0-10 Minutes

Inventory Time ( waiting Time)        134 Minutes                 Inventory Time ( waiting Time)       <50 Minutes

Takt Time (seconds/part)              28.8 seconds/part           Takt Time (seconds/part)             <20 seconds/part

First Time Quality :                  58%                         First Time Quality :                 90%

Change-Over time:                     60 Minutes                  Change-Over time:                    <30 Minutes




                                 Figure 2.5: Process Performance Metrics (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)
                                                Figure 5: Process Metrics

                                                                                                    20 | P a g e
 Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
2.4.4 Detailed Project Schedule - Modified
         Figure 2.6 shows the progress of schedule when 26% of the worked has been completed. The
         Black Bar shows the Baseline Schedule; The Blue Bar shows Baseline Modified Schedule ; The
         Red Bar shows the Critical Path for the Baseline Modified Schedule


                             Figure 2.6: Baseline Modified Schedule (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)




                                                                                               21 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
2.4.5 Specific Challenges
                 Specific challenges in the following areas of: Supply, Communication, Operations, Systems,
                 People, Legal and Quality were all identified in our Risk Assessment, and included in our Risk
                 Assessment Matrix, with Contingency plans.

       2.4.6 Risk Management Matrix
                 The Project Team will follow recommendations according to the detailed Risk Management
                 Matrix considering the major and top risks on the projects and contingency action plans. Top
                 Risks considered while developing the project schedule are shown in Table 2.10.
                 The Baseline Modified Risk Assessment includes the new risk and contingency for Supplier
                 Selection, and the current contingency plan that is currently in progress. Figure 2.7
                 summarizes the Risk Assessment considerations. Section 2.4.7 addresses action plans for
                 Shipping and Hiring/Placement risks. Top major risks considered during project planning phase.
                 Baseline Risk Matrix per activity attached on Appendix A.

                                    Table 2.10: Risk Matrix (Modified) (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)

Risk                                                                           Severity
                Activity                        Risk          Type4   Prob.      1=Low      Rank             Contingency
 #                                                                               5=High
 1     Shipping of Equipment         Delays in Shipping for                                         Avoid winter season by pulling
                                     Winter Season                                                  ahead project with overtime in
                                                              SUP      85%         5         4.25
                                                                                                    the Design Phase

 2     Supplier Selection            Late Change of                                                 Ensure suppliers are ranked
                                     Suppliers, limited                                             among top Suppliers in the
                                     Suppliers                SUP      75%         5         3.75   Industry. Have a Backup
                                                                                                    Supplier Plan Ready in Case
                                                                                                    selected Supplier fails to comply

 3     Hiring/Placement              Labor Conflicts for                                            Avoid Labor Conflicts and
                                     new Entrants due to                                            Stoppage by preparing an HR
                                     Potential Layoffs -        R      65%         5         3.25   Placement Plan Ahead and
                                     Strike                                                         Presenting to Production
                                                                                                    Management
 4     Displacement of Old           Damage of production                                           Avoid Damages by
       Equipment                     Equipment                                                      Using Experts in Transportation,
                                                              OPE      65%         5         3.25   Include Equipment in Insurance
                                                                                                    Coverage before acquisition

 5     Design Changes                Late Design Changes                                            Use ECN and Change
       Engineering                                                                                  Management Process for
                                                                                                    Engineering Change
                                                              ENG      75%         4         3.00   Communication. Implement Red
                                                                                                    Zone and Freeze Date for
                                                                                                    Engineering Changes



       4
           SUP=Supply, HR=Human Resource, OPE=Operations, ENG=Engineering, QUA=Quality



                                                                                                           22 | P a g e
       Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
Risk                                                                                                                     Severity
                Activity                                  Risk                          Type            Prob.               1=Low            Rank                             Contingency
 #                                                                                                                          5=High
 6     Install/Calibration of               Delays on installation                                                                                          Invite Supplier to Installation.
       Equipment                            due to complexity                               OPE         55%                   5              2.75           Turnkey In Service Installation

 7     Construction                         Safety Regulations not                                                                                          Revision of legal, permits and
       Requirements                         in Compliance                                   ENG         50%                   5                 2.5         safety by Safety Committee

 8     Engineering Testing                  Parts fails to Product                                                                                          Prepare Six Sigma Teams for
                                            Engineering/Quality                          QUA            50%                   5                 2.5         Action Plans
                                            Validation Compliance
 9     Negotiations                                                                                                                                         Set Target Price, Benchmark and
                                            Negotiations exceed
                                                                                            SUP         75%                   3              2.25                 3 Quotation Process
                                            Budget
10     Equip. Fabrication                   Delays of fabrication                                                                                           Select Expert Suppliers and Visit
                                            due to complex                                                                                                   of Manufacturing Engineering
                                            customization                                                                                                   Development, include overtime
                                                                                            SUP         55%                   4                 2.2           to pull ahead development
                                                                                                                                                             dates. Have Two Alternatives
                                                                                                                                                             Suppliers ready for contracts

11     Production Validation                Worker’s absence due                                                                                                 Prepare a list of Floater Pool
                                            to winter and lack of                           OPE         50%                   4                 2               workers as part of the HR Plan
                                            motivation



                                   Figure 2.7: Risk Summary Chart - Modified (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)



                                                              Risk Assessment Summary

                                       5            5            5            5                           5            5           5


                                4.25         4.25                                            4                                                              4             4


                                                          3.25         3.25                                                                     3
                                                                                        3
                                                                                                   2.75
                                                                                                                 2.5         2.5
                                                                                                                                         2.25         2.2
                                                                                                                                                                      2



                            85%            75%                                    75%                                                  75%
                                                        65%          65%                         55%          50%          50%                      55%         50%




                                                                                  Prob           Rank         Severity



                                                                                                                                                                          23 | P a g e
       Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
2.4.7 Top Risk Recommended Action Plans
          1. Shipping/Weather Risk

                                 Table 2.11: Weather/Shipping Action Plan (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)

                       CURRENT                                                         ALTERNATIVE
  Shipping of new equipment will be planned from                 Plan for overtime work during the Design and Purchasing
November 2010 through February 2011, which is in the             Activities will mitigate Shipping Risk, pulling ahead Project
middle of winter Season, delaying the installation and            Schedule almost 1 Month ahead and reducing total cost
                      training                                     of the project due to MVB1 and MVB2 synchronization
                                                    COSTS (Only Project )
      Project Cost – Expected                                         Project Cost – Expected
                                               $2,232,654                                                     $2,184,458
           w/o Overtime                                                   with Overtime
                                                                     Project Cost – Pessimistic
    Project Cost – Pessimistic-
                                                  2,557,217        with Overtime + Winter Storm               $2,389,912
   w/o Overtime + Winter Storm

    Contingency Cost- Risk                     $324,563               Contingency Cost - Risk                 $205,454
                                                                  Extra Overtime Cost – 342 ours                $11,970
                                                           BENEFITS
           Delays and bigger Inbound Cost                                       Better Working Shipping Schedule
                  higher Shipping Fees                                                 Lower Shipping Fees
       Installation and Training over Christmas                             Avoid Christmas holidays work overlapping
      Expected Finish Project in March 28, 2011                              Expected Finish Project in Marc 3,2011
           Late Finish Risk August 10, 2011                                       Late Finish Risk April 26, 2011




          Labor Overtime Plan to Mitigate Shipping Risk


                              Table 2.12: Overtime Proposal (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)

               Tasks                           Resource          Overtime           Rate        Total
                                                                   hrs                          Labor
 Layout Design                         Facility Engineer              80             35            $2800
 Equipment Design                      Process Engineer               54             35            $1890
 Equipment Design                      Systems Engineer               20             35             $700
 Equipment Design                      Material Engineer              27             35             $945
 Procurement                           Buyer                          81             35            $2835
 Equipment Development                 Manufacturing Engineer         40             35            $1400
 Equipment Development                 Supplier                       40             35            $1400
 Total                                                                342                       $11,970




                                                                                                           24 | P a g e
 Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
2. Hiring/Placement Risk

                             Table 2.13: Labor Conflicts Action Plan (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)

                      CURRENT                                                     ALTERNATIVE
                  Total: 42 Workers                                                Total : 16 Workers
8 Wire Gauge Checkers                                           2 Gauge Operators
3 Gauge Inspectors                                              5 Wire Forming Operators Shift 1
10 Wire Forming Operators Shift 1                               5 Wire Forming Operators Shift 2
8 Wire Forming Operators Shift 2                                2 Welders Operators Shift 1
4 Wire Forming Operators Shift 3                                2 Welders Operators Shift 2
5 Welders Shift 1                                                                           +
3 Welders Shift 2                                               HR Distribution of 26 Workers:
1 Welders Shift 3                                               46% - 12 Workers Placement with Suppliers and OEM’s
                                                                15% - 4 Floaters
                                                                27% - 7 Workers Trained for Value Added Operations
                                                                12% - 3 Workers Low Performers
                                                           COSTS
Cost/Mont                                     $103,636          Cost/Mont                               $42,257
Probability of Work                                             Probability of Work
                                                %65                                                       <%20
Stoppage                                                        Stoppage
                                                         BENEFITS
                  Mechanical Labor                                          Automated and Controlled Labor
         High Risk to incidents and accidents,                            Reduce the incidents and accidents,
               Safety and Health issues                                           Increase ergonomics
                   Higher Fixed Cost                                                Lower Fixed cost
             Technical Skills Development                                 Professional Technical Development
           High Takt time, low Productivity                                Low Takt time, higher Productivity
            Professional Career Stagnation                          Career Growth Opportunities in Top Companies
   High gaps to negotiate placement of labor force                  Close gap to negotiate placement of labor force


          Human Resource Action Plan to Mitigate Risk


                              Table 2.14: Replacement Proposal (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)
                                    Identify job opportunities with higher paying salaries for those employees that
                                     will be released from their duties.
Placement                           Employees should not be laid off until an acceptable position in a OEM’s or
                                     Supplier has been arranged and contracted

                                    Identify those employees who will remain in the organization as on-call in the
                                     organization.
Floater                             These group of employees can rotate in different positions as required, and can
                                                            rd
                                     be prepare for future 3 shift or production increments

                                    Identified High Performer Workers to remain in the organization and trained for
Trainees                             value added operations.

                                    Workers who will need to be laid off due to their low performance
Low Performers




                                                                                                         25 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
3. Automated Equipment


         The Project intends to install state of the art new equipment for the facility. However, this new
         equipment is sophisticated and should be calibrated by experts. There is a risk to delay the
         installation, setup and validation of equipment, assuming proper training and assistance is not in
         place. It is recommended to close a Turnkey in Service installation from Equipment Supplier.
         This means the supplier will accompany the team of engineers during the installation, training,
         setup and validation of production. With this action it is intended to mitigate the uncertainty of
         setup, functioning and operation of new equipment, while training the group of engineers for
         future control, operation and maintenance of new equipment. The New Equipment will have
         period of guarantee of 90 days and will require maintenance assistance from the Vendor
         periodically. A new Contingency Plan for OEM Supplier Change is explained on section 6.0




                                                                                              26 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
2.5 Project Completion Plan
2.5.1 Deliverables




                                                                                                                     27 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600




                                              Figure 2.8: Project Completion/Deliverables (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)
2.5.2 Acceptance Test
         The Project will follow the Program Quality and Readiness Review (PQRR) as a Stage Gate
         Model. Different Review Valves will allow for checking of metrics, deliverables and buying off
         before proceeding to the next Stage of the Project. There are nine (9) Review Valves as follow:

                                    Table 2.15: Stage Gate Reviews (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)

         Gate Name                            Initials Objectives
    1.   Preliminary Plan Review                PP       Test Preliminary Project Information
    2.   Program Initiation Review              PI       Test Project Plan, Team Structure and Initiation
    3.   Manufacturing Engineering              MP       Test Engineering Design and R Planning
         Review
    4.   Verify Data Release Review             VDR      Validate Engineering Documentation for Procurement
    5.   Contract Sign-Off                      CSO      Validated Procurement and Contract with External Suppliers
    6.   Production/ Operations                 POD      Test readiness of Operations/ Production
         Review
    7.   Manufacturing Validation              MVB       Validation new equipment and parts out of new production line
         Build I                                 I
    8.   Manufacturing Validation              MVB       Validation new equipment and parts out of new production line
         Build II                                II
    9.   Start of Regular Production           SORP      Final Approval and Sign-off to regular production, Cost validation


         Figure 2.9 represents the Acceptance Test to define when a PQRR Valve should be Approved,
         Revised or Stopped.

                                              Figure 2.9: Acceptance Test Chart (Motors, 2006)




                                                                                                            28 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
2.5.3 Acceptance Sign-off Cart
         Figure 2.10 shows a check list of items to be completed at each Review Valve




                                              Figure 2.10: Acceptance Criteria/Sign-0ff Chart (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)
                                                                                                                         29 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
3 Management Proposal
                      3.1 Corporate Organizational Structure
                               API has a Matrix Organization structured based on Projects. The Project Team will report directly to the Project Manager for task related
                               projects, also they will report to operations and functional managers from different departments.

                                                                          Figure 3.1: Corporate Organizational Chart (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)


                                                                                                             President
                                                                                                               CEO
                                                                                                              Owen
                                                                                                              French

Project Monitoring               Director of                                             Director of                                                         Supply and    Director of        Sales and       Finance
   & Controlling                 Engineering                                             Operations                                                         Procurement     Human             Marketing       Director
Director, Dick Ives                                                                                                                                           Director     Resources           Director
                           Product      Manufacturing      Quality        Materials                                      Production
                                                                                                                                                              Purchasing                                      Finance
                         Engineering     Engineering       Manager        Manager                                         Manager                                          HR Manager       Sales/Marketing
                          Manager                                                                                                                              Manager                                        Manager
                                          Manager                                                                                                                                               Manager

                                                                Quality      Materials        Production       Production                         Safety                                                         Finance
     Project                 Product         Facility                                         Supervisor                         Maintenance                    Buyer             HR
                                                               Engineer      Engineer                          Supervisor                      Ergonomics                                                        Auditor
    Manager A                Engineer       Engineer                                            Shift 1                           Engineer                                     Specialist       Salesperson
                                                                                                                 Shift 2                       Supervisor

                              Testing       Industrial                                          Production        Production                                                                    Marketing
                             Engineer       Engineer                                             Workers           Workers                                                                      Specialist

                                            Product
                                            Engineer

                                             System
                                            Engineer

                                               Manufacturing
                                                 Engineer




                                                                                                                                                                                                  30 | P a g e
                      Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
3.1.1 Corporate Roles and Responsibilities
         The purpose of the Corporate Responsibility Matrix ( table 3.1) is to assign departments or
         individuals to activity categories, define role responsibilities, and define relationships between
         groups. This matrix should be completed before detailed resource allocating or scheduling. The
         goals of the roles and responsibilities matrix are to:
              Define roles and responsibilities of project stakeholders.
              Improve overall project team and stakeholder communication.
              Proactively identify gaps in assignments, accountability, or resources.
              Clarify cross-functional interactions between project team members.
              Document project interdependencies with other enterprise initiatives.
              Define project team interactions with supporting resources and departments.

                                      Table 3.1: Corporate Responsibility Matrix (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)

                                                            Project Activity (Spring Automation)
         Organization Title                                                               Project
                                   Requirements         Design            Test                         Training
                                                                                       Communication

     Project Management:
     Monitoring &                        R                 C               S               A/R              S
     Controlling

     Engineering
                                       A/R/C            A/R/C             R/C               C                S

     Finance
                                          S                                                 C

     Operations/
     Production/                          S                S                S               S/C             R
     Manufacturing

     Supply and
                                        A/C                S                                C/S
     Procurement

     Human Resources
                                                                                            C/S             A/R

         KEY:
         A – Accountable for successful completion of task.
         R – Responsible for completion of task. (Task can be delegated to this person.)
         S – Supports task.
         C – Requirements communication about the task.




                                                                                                       31 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
Table 3.2: Corporate Roles & Responsibilities (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)

           Title                                  Role                                       Responsibilities
 Project Manager             The Project Manager is responsible for            Project Plan
                             developing, in conjunction with the Project       Manage and lead the project team.
                             Sponsor, the project charter. The Project
                                                                               Manage the coordination of the partners
                             Manager ensures that the project is delivered
                                                                                and the working groups.
                             on time, within budget, and to the required
                             quality standards.                                Develop and maintain a detailed project
                                                                                plan.

 Engineering                 The Engineering department’s role is to             Layout, Facility Design
                             Perform as a manager or project systems             Construction Plan and Requirements
                             engineer for a complex project (e.g. several
                                                                                 Regulations and Permits
                             distinct subsystems or other defined services,
                             capabilities, or products and their associated      Requirement and Specs. Development
                             interfaces).                                        Process Assembly Instructions
                                                                                 Tools and Equipment Requirement Specs.
                                                                                 Standard Procedures Operation Sheets
                                                                                 Visual Aids
                                                                                 Simulation of Production
                                                                                 Testing
                                                                                 Total Productive Maintenance
                                                                                 Quality/Engineering Product Testing Plan
                                                                                 Engineering Review Valve

 Finance                     Once the organization as established goals     Audits of Financials
                             and associated strategies (or ways to reach
                             the goals), funds are set aside for the
                             resources and labor to the accomplish goals
                             and tasks. As the money is spent, statements
                             are changed to reflect what was spent, how it
                             was spent and what it obtained. Review of
                             financial statements is one of the more
                             common methods to monitor the progress of
                             programs and plans. The most common
                             financial statements include the balance
                             sheet, income statement and cash flow
                             statement.
                             The major work of the                               Installation Plan
                             Project accomplished (i.e., design,
 Operations/                                                                     Simultaneous Production Plan
                             development, construction, production,
 Production/                 testing, system activation, etc.).                  Manufacturing Validation Plan
                                                                                 Training




                                                                                                         32 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
Title                                  Role                                        Responsibilities
 Supply and                  The role of Procurement is to understand the         RFP
 Procurement                 project management process, utilize specific         Bidding
                             procurement needs during the life cycle of the
                                                                                  Negotiation
                             project including solicitation methods
                             (RFI/RFQ/RFP), total cost of ownership               Supplier Selection
                             analysis, cost/price analysis, negotiation, and      Assess Performance
                             understanding the benefit of integrating the
                             procurement tools.

 Human Resources                                                             Labor hiring
                             Perform structured analysis of skill types and
                             quantities; use resource scheduling estimates;  Recruitment Planning
                             plot graph of staffing requirements versus      Ensure Training.
                             actual and report status periodically.
                             Determine skill levels from work package
                             estimates; identify experience requirements
                             and gap analysis; use metrics as critical
                             success factor; plan hiring and training to
                             meet details.




                                                                                                         33 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
Work Package 1.3.3.2 has been added
3.2 Project Organizational plan                                                             1.0
                                                                                                                              after unexpected event – Vendor
                                                                                     Springs Assembly                       Selection Change. This new package is
                                                                                     Line Automation
3.2.1 Work Breakdown Structure                                                            Project                                required to review all specs,
                                                                                                                             requirements and drawings of new
                                                                                                                           vendor B according to the future layout
                                                                                                                             and production and process design

                1.1                           1.2                                           1.3
          General Admin                Contingency                                        Project




              1.3.1                                     1.3.2                                           1.3.3                               1.3.4
             Project
                                                    Manufacturing                                   Procurement                    Production/Operations
            Planning

                                                            1.3.2.1
                                                                                                                                           1.3.4.1
                                                            Layout                                              1.3.3.1
                                                            Design                                                                      Installation
                      1.3.1.1                                                                               Purchasing
               Preliminary Plan
                                                            13.2.2                                                                         1.3.4.2
                                                          Tools/Equip
                                                                                                                                       Maintenance
                                                            Design
                                                                                                                1.3.3.2                 Training
                      1.3.1.2
                                                                                                         New Tool/Specs
               Communication
                                                                13.2.3                                      Revision                       1.3.4.3
                   Plan
                                                        Process Design                                                               Human Resources


                                                            1.3.2.4                                          1.3.3.3                       1.3.4.4
                                                           Buildout                                          Tooling                    MVB Training
                                                                                                          Development/
                                                            1.3.2.5                                             Shipping
                                                                                                                                            1.3.4.5
                                                        Manufacturing
                                                        Validation Plan                                                                 Finance Audit

                                                                                                                                                       34 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600

                                                                    Figure 3.2: WBS (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)
3.2.2 Project Organizational Structure
                                                              Figure 3.3: Project Organizational Structure (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)


                                                                                          Bob Johnson
                                                                                        Project Manager


                                                                              Dick Ives Project
                                                                                  Planning
                                                                                  Director

                                                                                                                                                          Director of
          Director of                                                         Director of                                              Director of                               Director of
                                                                                                                                                           Human
          Engineering                                                         Operations                                                 Supply                                   Finance
                                                                                                                                                          Resources

 Manufact              Product
                                                              Materials                                               Production           Equipment                                 Fianancial
Engineering          Engineering       Quality Manager                                                                                                       HR Specialist
                                                              Manager                                                  Manager               Buyer                                    Auditor
 Manager              Manager

                                                                                                                                                          Safety
                                                                  Materials          Production              Production            Maintenance
 Facility Engineer      Testing Engineer   Quality Engineer                                                                                            Ergonomics
                                                                  Engineer        Supervisor Shift 1      Supervisor Shift 2        Engineer
                                                                                                                                                       Supervisor


     Industrial                                                                          Wire Gauge             Wire Gauge
      Engineer                                                                          Operators (2)           Operators(2)


     Systems                                                                             Wire Form               Wire Form
     Engineer                                                                           Operators (5)           Operators(5)


  Manufacturing                                                                       Robots Welders          Robots Welders
   Engineer (2)                                                                        Operators (2)           Operators (2)                                                 Project Team
                                                                                                                                                                               Members

                                                                                                                                                                              Support to
                                                                                                                                                                             Project Team

                                                                                                                                                                    35 | P a g e
     Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
3.2.3 Project Team
                             Table 3.3: Project Team Roles & Responsibilities (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)

           Title             Project Role                                  Responsibility
 Project Planning                             Ensure that project does not conflict with API goals. Provide assistance
                            Project
 Director                                     as needed to ensure completion of tasks. Ensure API Board is aware of
                            Sponsor
                                              status.
 Project Manager                              Drive project tasks to completion. Ensures that project expenses
                            Project           remain within budget. Ensure Project Completion on estimated Timing
                            Manager

 Director of                Engineering       Ensure Design and Engineering Practices are in place and according to
 Engineering                Support           API Standards and Regulations
 Manufacturing
                            Engineering       Ensure Manufacturing Design and Engineering Practices are in place
 Engineering
                            Support           and according to API Standards and Regulations
 Manager
 Facility Engineer          Project Team      Provide project support with coordination of facility requirements.
 Industrial Engineer                          Provide project support with coordination of Lean Manufacturing
                            Project Team      Design, Ergonomics and Safety facility, Material Flow Design and
                                              requirements.
 Manufacturing                                Lead the integration of equipment, layout and process design to
 Engineer                                     completion. Supervise the construction of new equipment, installation
                            Project Team
                                              and functioning. Prepare Manufacturing Validation Plan and
                                              implementation
 Product Engineering        Engineering       Ensure Product Design Compliance with functional, dimensional,
 Manager                    Support           durability and reliability specs.
 Testing Engineer                             Perform Test routines in finished products for design validation
                            Project Team
                                              according to specs
 Director of                Operations        Ensure Operations are planned according to assembly line design,
 Operations                 Support           manage resources for production, maintenance, safety and ergonomics

 Quality Manager            Operations        Ensure Quality Audits and Inspection Plans are in place to prevent
                            Support           defects and promote improvement of operations
 Quality Engineer                             Design the Quality Plan for the Automated Assembly line, inspection
                            Project Team
                                              stations and Audits Plans
 Material Handling          Operations
                                              Coordinate the Material Flow in the Operations
 Manager                    Support
 Material Supervisor                          Perform Rack Design, Basket and Market Design, Feeding Racks, and
                            Project Team
                                              Material Flow Scheduling
 Safety & Ergonomics                          Ensure all Safety Regulations and Ergonomics Practices are in place and
                            Project Team
 Supervisor                                   within regulations
 Production Manager                           Coordinate Production Schedule, Manage and Assign Resources,
                            Production        Coordinate Production Operations
                            Support


                                                                                                          36 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
Title             Project Role                                  Responsibility
 Wire Gauge
                            Project Team      Ensure proper selection of wire supply, ready to feed the assembly line.
 Operators
 Wire Form                                    Ensure proper control and use of Wire Forming Equipment, Production
                            Project Team
 Operators                                    of Scheduled Wire Forms
 Robotic Welders                              Ensure proper operations of value added operations: welding,
                            Project Team
 Operators                                    assemblies, others.
 Maintenance                                  Prepare Preventive and Corrective Maintenance Plans for new
 Engineer                                     Equipment and New tooling. Define a DFMEA (Design Failure and
                            Project Team
                                              Mode Analysis) for Risky factors in the operations. Train, Supervise
                                              Plans for work force
 Supply Procurement                           Ensure Materials and Procurements are supplied on time and
 Director                   Supply            according to production schedule. Ensure purchase orders and
                            Support           procurement process complies with internal control procedures.
                                              Control cost of materials and Contract Agreements
 Equipment Buyer                              Prepare Request for Proposal, Bid Solicitations, Rounds of
                                              Negotiations, Supplier Selection and Business Assignment. Ensure
                            Project Team      Suppliers comply with requirements and quality expected according to
                                              the SOR (State of Requirements). Define payments terms and purchase
                                              order release.
 Director of Human          Labor Force       Ensure proper hiring, placement and training, payroll and benefits of
 Resources                  Support           the organization.
 Human Resource                               Prepare Placement and hiring Plan of new and transferred employees,
 Specialist                 Project Team      prepare and support the training plan for new operations and
                                              equipment.
 Finance Director           Financial         Ensure project Cost is in control and within budget. Support Internal
                            Control           Control Procedures
                            Support
 Finance Auditor                              Help the project Manager control cost and report any deviations from
                                              the Budget. Help Prepare actions plans and reports for Management
                            Project Team      Reviews. Define, Review and Approve new Cost Structure for
                                              Production.




                                                                                                          37 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
3.2.4 Responsibility Matrix
         Blue text lines represent Tasks Activities for Working Packages. Package 1.3.3.2: New Tools
         /Equipment Revision Specs was added to the Responsibility Matrix to validate specifications and
         requirements of Vendor B.
                       Figure 3.4: Project Team Responsibility Matrix- Modified (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)




Acronyms:




                                                                                                    38 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
WBS= Work Breakdown Structure
SOP’s = Standard Operating Procedures
RFP = Request for Proposal
MVB = Manufacturing Validation Build
SORP = Start of Regular Production

R=Responsible
A=Accountable
S= Support
I= Information
C= Consult




                                              39 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
4 Management Systems
4.1 Supplier, Selection and Management
4.1.1 Overview - Procurement of Automated Machines and Robots
          The Procurement process is lead by our Purchasing Department under the procedure shown in
          Table 4.1 and Figure 4.1. The internal procedure requires minimum of 3 Vendors for bidding and
          negotiations. Selection Criteria, Scoring and Final results for vendor selection are shown on
          section 4.1.2. Electro Measure was the selected vendor, however and due to financial struggles
          negotiations with Vendor B are retaken to change OEM vendor as explained in Action Plan
          Section 6.

                                               Table 4.1: Procurement Process Procedures
Define Requirements          Request and Evaluate Bids from              Select a Source and Negotiate Contract                 Carry out the
    and Develop                    Potential Sources                                      Terms                              Contract and Pursue
  Purchasing Plan                                                                                                                Continuous
                                                                                                                                Improvement
The first step in the      Purchasing automated machines is not a      After the initial bids have been received,            The contract must be
purchasing process is to   simple matter of transferring pattern       evaluated and ranked, the qualifying, best-value      completed by two
define the product         numbers and quantity desired from the       bids will be selected. If the component is well       actions: on-time delivery
requirements and           engineering bill of materials to a          defined in terms of simple shape/complexity and       of a fully qualified
develop a purchasing       purchase order. Careful consideration of    of relatively low risk, the quotation may be          product at the agreed
plan. Product              technical quality, quantity and schedule    sufficient for closing the contract and moving into   cost by the vendor and
requirements are based     factors is necessary to ensure that all     production.                                           prompt and timely
on technical               pertinent and important information is                                                            payment by the buyer.
performance and targets    supplied to the vendor.                     However, for the more complex, additional             During the life of the
for quality, quantity,                                                 engineering design and contract negotiation may       contract, all parties have
schedule and cost. With    The vendor should receive a design          be required to reach final agreement. Specifically,   a valuable stake in
this information, a        layout of the machine part or the           it may be necessary to:                               continuous improvement
complete and accurate      existing machining that the automated       1. perform a final review and refinement of the       in quality, delivery and
request for quotation      machines will be replacing. If the vendor      design for manufacturability with the design       best value. Specific issues
can be drafted.            is to provide the most suitable and            engineer                                           that must be considered
                           useful components, it is important that     2. finalize technical, quality and schedule           during the production
                           the buyer indicates the areas to be            requirements;                                      cycle include: • open and
                           machined and the locating points for        3. review and resolve non-technical contractual       timely communication
                           machining.                                     issues.                                            (by visits, phone calls, e-
                                                                          In contract negotiations, all parties should       mail, etc.) between
                                                                          consider the following factors: • the level and    customer and supplier on
                           In addition, the buyer must know and                                                              project status, shortfalls,
                           understand the critical factors in             scope of technical service, including design
                                                                          consultation, production, quality control and      potential problems,
                           specifying components and how those                                                               forecasted changes and
                           factors impact production and costs.           product improvement:
                                                                       1. detailed instructions and guidance on              opportunities for value
                                                                          specifications and quality assurance               improvement;
                           A request-for-quotation will provide           requirements                                       • monitoring of quality,
                           component requirements to develop a         2. assigned responsibilities for and integration of   delivery, cost and
                           comprehensive and detailed                     supporting engineering activities among the        performance by both the
                           approach. It supplies the vendor with          different production activities.                   supplier and the
                           complete information on requirements        3. cost of quality assessment (rejects delays,        customer;
                           and enables the vendor to make an              rework, etc.)                                      • identification of
                           accurate price quotation.                   4. scheduling and lead-time planning                  opportunities to improve
                                                                       5. product liability.                                 quality and increase
                                                                                                                             value to the final
                                                                                                                             customer by the
                                                                                                                             customer and supplier.


                                                                                                                      40 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
Figure 4.1: Procurement Process (Garrett, 2007)




4.1.2 Production-Line Equipment Vendors
           The Equipment Vendor selection consists of a three-step process. The criteria for vendor
           selection is based on five (5) categories5 as shown below with their corresponding weight
           factors:




5
    Selection Criteria and Vendor Evaluation Forms from Excel Vendor Evaluation Analysis Template

                                                                                                    41 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
Based on the scoring of the three top vendors, Electro Measure was selected to supply the
         Automated Wire Gauge Checkers and Wire Forming equipment, with a score of 94.50.
         However, due to financial struggles of Electro Measure, Vendor B has been considered for a
         new contract negotiation for the Wire Gauge and Wire Forming Equipment.

         Vendor B was previously selected for the Robotics Welders, since this is their field of expertise.
         The fabrication and shipping of the robotic equipment continues as planned in the original
         baseline schedule.



                                                                                                42 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
4.1.3 Computer Vendors
         API’s computers for the automation project will be acquired through the office supply
         procurement process of its normal operating procedures. All other office supplies for
         administration duties will be acquired through the normal operating procedures for office
         supplies. All office supplies or equipment budgeted for this project will follow the normal
         operating procedures for procurement of office supplies. Therefore, for all office supplies or
         equipment for this project, there will be no RFP or bid process.

4.1.4 Contract Close-Out
         The Contract Close-Out with selected vendors will be following the complete assessment and
         checklist as shown in Appendix H. A Contract Memorandum is to be written and signed by both
         parties as a closure on the contract agreement and delivery of service.

                                                   API CONTRACT
                                              CLOSEOUT MEMORANDUM

         AGREEMENT NUMBER:

         RECIPIENT:

          PERFORMANCE COMPLETION/DELIVERABLES: Recipient as satisfactorily completed
         performance and delivered all required reports/documentation. Recipient submitted
         final expenditure report on __________ and final technical report on ___________.
         [Explain actions taken.]

         PAYMENT: Payment Terms will be a fixed price payable in 4 different stages: 25%
         Deposit at contract agreement, 25% at delivery, 25% at installation, 25% at training and
         service validation.

         OTER CLOSEOUT ISSUES: all contract terms will be according the Terms and Conditions
         explained in the contract agreement.

         Based on my review of the agreement and closeout documentation, I have determined
         that all administrative actions are complete and that the agreement may be closed.


                                                                          Financial
         Auditor
         DateWorksheet and Checklist for Close-out terms are to be attached to this memo.




                                                                                              43 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
4.2 Monitoring Cost and Schedule
4.2.1 Overview
         Figure4.2 represents a flow chart for monitoring control, each box is sequenced from 1 to 14 to define the procedure that will determine
         any change in cost or schedule.




                                                   Figure 4.2: Monitoring Process (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)
                                                                                                                                     44 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
4.2.2 Labor Cost and Schedule
         Labor cost was divided in three different categories:
         1. Professional Staff consisting of engineers, managers and Supervisors
         2. Operations Staff: Operators for the new equipped assembly line
         3. Current Operations Staff: Operators, Inspectors and Assembly Line workers of current
         operation, which will participate in the validation and transfer of operations to the new
         Automated Assembly Line

         Tables 4.2 and 4.3 show the Labor Cost and Schedule Rates for each of the labor resources.
         Schedule and Cost are revised according to the Baseline Modified scenario. Baseline Cost is
         shown on Appendix B.


                                     Table 4.2: Salary Labor Cost (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)




                                                                                              45 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
6
                               Table 4.3: Hourly Labor (Automated Line) Cost (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)




                                                                                 7
                                 Table 4.4: Hourly (Current Line) Labor Cost (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)




6
     (1)resource for Shift 1 ; (2) resource for shift 2
7
    (1) resource for Shift 1 ; (2) resource for shift 2 ; (3) resource shift 3


                                                                                                        46 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
4.2.3 Major Equipment Cost and Schedule
         As explained in section 2.4.3, the future process will require automated equipment to improve
         the production flow. The list of equipments remains the same after the Baseline Modified
         explained in section 6.

         Table 4.5 shows updated equipment cost for Vendor B with a 5% increment from the baseline
         budget (seen on table 2.5 and Appendix B). This additional cost will be absorbed by the
         contingency budget.

                                  Table 4.5: Equipment Cost (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)




4.2.4 Contingency, Administration and Others Cost
         Contingency Cost was initially estimated at $215,123. The current problem we are facing with
         the Supplier Selection will require $83,935 to be deducted from the Contingency Budget to stay
         within the Planned Schedule and Budget. More details will be explained in the Cost Section 5.0.
         Table 4.6 shows the Baseline Modified Budget for Administration, Travel and the remaining
         Contingency Budget.

                          Table 4.6: Contingency Cost and Others (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)




                                                                                            47 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
4.3 Management of Scope and Change Orders
     4.3.1 Overview
                                            Table 4.7: Change Management Process (Services, 2010)
         Change Request Process                      Roles and Responsibilities                                  Notes
Team Lead initiates Change Request by              Originate change requests based on     • Requests resulting in changes to the vendor
completing the Change Request Information          implementation needs using             contract require approval from the Project
section on the Change Request Form and             approved forms and communication       Sponsor.
submitting to Project Managers.                    processes. Requests from team          • No changes to the contract should be acted upon
                                                   members should be discussed with       or conveyed as an approved change until we have
                                                   the appropriate Team Lead prior to     verified that we are in compliance with the original
                                                   submitting an official change          contract.
                                                   request.                               • Changes to Equipment, Software, budget, or
                                                                                          contracted ours will be reviewed, managed and
                                                                                          approved by the Project Manager.
                                                                                          • First priority will be given to change requests for
                                                                                          mission-critical functions and/or services.
Project Managers review with Team Lead;            Facilitate the completion of change     Other criteria for evaluating change requests will
identify needed information and next steps to      requests and information gathering.    be approved by the Change Review Team.
complete; enter into Change Request Log. Project   Work directly with vendors (e.g.       • Project Scope Change Management Plan
managers communicate and coordinate (as            services or software estimate) and     Documents:
needed) with appropriate personnel to gather       with appropriate personnel,            o Change Request Form
needed information.                                administrative and academic offices    o Change Request Log
                                                   (e.g. workarounds, changes to          o Scope Change Management Plan
                                                   policies and procedures) to collect
                                                   information needed to complete the
                                                   request.
                                                   Implementation
Project Managers prepare and submit Change
Request Impact Analysis section and submit to
the Change Management Team.
Institution Implementation Team receives weekly    Receive updates of completed
updates of pending change requests and provides    change requests pending approval.
input as needed / requested.                       Provide input as needed/requested.
Change Management Team approves/denies             Evaluate, allow or disallow change
change request, provides Final Recommendation      requests based on the submitted
on the Change Request Form and advises project     information. Call upon the Project
Managers.                                          Manager and Team Leads to provide
                                                   additional information as needed to
                                                   complete review. Escalate resolution
                                                   to Executive Steering
                                                   Committee as needed.
If appropriate, forward for review and
disposition.
Project Managers communicate the decision to:
a. The Team Lead making the request of the
Change Review Team decision.
b. Implementation Team.
c. All Project Managers and appropriate
interested parties.
d. Makes appropriate entries into the Change
Management Request Log.
 Modify Implementation plan and documentation
as needed to incorporate approved change.



                                                                                                                    48 | P a g e
     Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
4.3.2 Development of Scope
         The scope of the project is evaluated within the operational tasks. There are working tasks to be
         within scope and out of scope. The Project is to remain within the following scope: project
         planning, facility design, manufacturing, production, procurement, installation, quality and
         validation.


         In-Scope


          Project Planning
             •Organize Project Team , Project Structure, Schedule and Activities. Earned Value Analysis (SPI CPI ) , Risk
              Management, Develop the Control and Working Plan of the project. Develop the communication plan,
              reports and formats to follow, develop a new Stage Gate Process for Valve approval.


          Facility Design
             •Design the new facility layout, define safety and ergonomics to comply with lean manufacturing
              standards. Develop the new Statement of Requirements (SOR) for new equipment to include in the new
              layout. Define new product and raw material requirements to feed the new assembly line.


          Manufacturing/Production
             •New Jigs and Tooling Development and Design Plan , Production line balancing/leveling, Production
              Volume/Capacity study, definition of new takt time, production plan learning curve, production plan
              training and work force requirements. New tools and equipment for material transportation to and inside
              the assembly line. Build Out plan to replace old assembly line with new assembly line layout.
              Incorporation of some Lean Manufacturing visual aids and layout, and flexibel manufacturing design.


          Procurement
             •Ensure to follow the Statement of Requirements issued by Manufacturing Engineering for new Tools, Jigs
              and Equipment, Rounds of Quotations, Negotiations, and Award of new equipment business.


          Installation of Tools and Equipment
             •Define the equipment installation plan,
             •Layout setup, equipment initial setup, electrical/utilities, water, air outlets installation, jigs installation,
              painting and signage installation. Also hiring of contractors for installation of equipment and tooling
              development.


          Quality/Manufacturing Validation
             •Define the validation and quality plan to validate production on new assembly line, audit of new
              production, quality control and inspection points, manufacturing production ramping plan, approval of
              production badges, dimensional plan, product engineering, bench and durability test plan, start of regular
              production.




                                                                                                              49 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
4.3.3 Out-of-Scope Items
         Out of Scope


        Detailed Quotation or Negotiation Strategies
           •This project will not include activities regarding RFP or Quotation Strategies. As a customer to the Procurement Process,
            Manufacturing Engineering will only consider the input timing given by the Purchasing Department, only controlling the
            bidding of RFP preparations based on the Statement of Requirements, and the output, a supplier selection.


        Revenues and Financials
           •This project will not control payments or bank disbursement. While controlling project Cost, any payments will be done
            through the regular financial methods of the company. Also the Revenues and potential new revenues will not be
            estimated in this project


        Sales and Marketing Strategies for new production capacity
           •The project will not cover neither promotion strategies for the new production capacity nor the reach of new sales
            targets or customers.


        Testing, Engineering Validation
           •This project will not address any new equipment or improvements of the quality or testing of finished products


        New Pricing Structure
           •The project will not establish the new price per product, the outcome of the project should be use as an input to establish
            new pricing structures.


        Shipping/Material Handling of input supply or output finished Products
           •The Project will not control any logistics, loading and unloading of shipped materials, regarding the supply inputs,
            material handling or shipping prior or after the assembly line process.


        Warrantee and Claims Issues
           • The project will not cover the warrantee claim process.



        Manufacturing/Production
           •The Project will not cover the incorporation of a Total Lean Manufacturing Implementation or Just In Time implemeation,
            this are separate projects to be considered in later or parallel with a different Project Team after the Automation project
            is in place.




                                                                                                                  50 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
4.3.4 Documentation of Change of Scope
         The process for Change Request is shown on figure 4.3. In order to request a change, Change
         Request Form (Appendix E ) needs to be filled out, explaining details on the problem or scope
         change. This information is added to the Problem Resolution System to share with the Project
         Team. The changes are submitted to the appropriate Change Committee for Approval, Rejection
         (Deny) or Revision (Undecided)

                                Figure 4.3: Change Management Process (Nicholas & Steyn, 2008)
                                             Change Management Process FlowChart.igx

                                                             Change
                                                            Generated




                                                                                 Yes
                                                            De facto?



                                                                 No

                                                          Document
                                                 ( Change Proposal or Request)



                                                    No                     Yes           Review
                                   Change                     Minor
                                                                                       Committe or
                                 Control Board               Change?
                                                                                        Individual




                                                          Formal Review
                                                         Change Commitee




                                       Undecided             Approve               Deny




                                                          Update System
                                                           configuration
                           Futher Analysis
                                                           and Project
                                                               Plan




                                                            Implement
                                                             Changes



                                                                                           Notify
                                                             Monitor                    Customer and
                                                             Changes                    Other affected
                                                                                        Stakeholders




                                                                                                         51 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
4.4 Quality Management
4.4.1 Overview
         The Quality Management Process is controlled through the Program Quality Revision Review
         (PQRR), which defines different stages in the Project to be evaluated for Performance Metrics.
         The Completion Plan on section 2.5 summarizes the PQRR reviews, deliverables and task to
         complete on each stage. Each review will have a supplier and customer, who will buy off the
         review, if all deliverables and items for that review are completed and if the metrics (shown in
         figure 2.5.3 Acceptance Sign-off) are in compliance.

         The Acceptance criteria (seen on Figure 2.5.4) will define the actions to take at each review.
         Additional action plans may be drawn from each review if the review is close in yellow status.

         The Quality System will be defined by identifying and tracking the performance and metrics for
         working packages and tasks. Work Packages are shown in Figure 4.5. More detailed information
         about the inputs, process and outcomes of each Work Package are shown on Figure 4.6, with
         the responsible organization to the process, supplier and customer of information and materials
         for each package.

         Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA) was developed to identify, prevent and have actions
         plans ready for potential defects on the product, process and the system. FMEA are shown on
         section 4.4.4. FMEA will be part of the Process Design Engineering.

         Statistical Process Control (SPC) will be in place for critical production variables. SPC is a
         methodology for monitoring the process to identify special causes of variation and signaling the
         need to take corrective action, when it is appropriate. (Evans, 2008).Critical dimensions, parts
         positioning, material flow, and assembly process of new parts and components will be defined
         in other to determine when specifications are out of control and when relevant corrective
         actions are needed to keep the production within high quality standards.

         Figure 4.4 summarizes API, Inc Quality Control System.




                                                                                              52 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
Figure 4.4: Quality Control System (Machinery, 2010)




                                                     Quality Control System.igx


                                                                                                Material
                                                    Yes                                        Inspection
                                                                IQC
                                                                                                Material
                                                                                               Certificate
                                                                   No

                                                                                              SPC Control




                                                                                                                    CONTINUOS IMPROVEMENT
                                                                                                Efficienty
                                                            Manufacture
                                                                                              Improvement
                                                                                                Training

                           Proces Study
                              Process
                             Capability                                                         Process
                                                    Yes                                         Control
                            Gage R&R                           IPQC
                               FMEA                                                            Gage Plan
                               Failure                                                            SPC
                             Analysis                              No
                              Candid
                             Feedback                                                            100%
                                                    Yes                                        Inspection
                                                               OQC                             Inspection
                                                                                             Record Check
                                                                                             Packaging List
                                                                   No                            Check



                                                            Packing and
                                                             Shipping




                                                             Customer                        Quality Service
                                                             Feedback                          Feedback



         IQC: Internal Quality Control
         IPQC: In-Process Quality Control
         OQC= Operational Quality Control
         FMEA: Failure Mode and Effect Analysis
         SPC: Statistical Process Control




                                                                                                              53 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
4.4.2 Work Package Identification

                                              Figure 4.5 : Work Packages (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)




                                                                                                    WBS numbering is drawn from the WBS section 4.1.2.
                                                                                                    There are 4 main phases: Project Planning, Manufacturing,
                                                                                                    Procurement and Production/Operations. Each phase
                                                                                                    consist of Working Packages and activities/tasks.

                                                                                                    Each Working Package has a number of Tasks to complete.
                                                                                                    Each Task is correspondingly indentified according to the
                                                                                                    numbering of the Working Package.




                                                                                                                                    54 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
4.4.3 Work Package Inputs, Process and Outputs




                                                                                                                           55 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600



                                              Figure 4.6: Work Package Inputs, Process, Outputs (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)
4.4.4 Determining Possible Defects
         Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA) (McCoy, 2009)


         An FMEA can be described as a systemized group of activities intended to:

         1) recognize and evaluate the potential failure of a product or a process and its effects,
         2) identify actions which could eliminate or reduce the chance of the potential failure occurring
         3) document the process. It is complementary to the design process of defining positively what
         a design must do to satisfy the customer.

         There are three basic cases for which FMEAs are generated, each with a different scope or
         focus.

         Case 1: New designs, new technology, or new process. The scope of the FMEA is the complete
         design, technology or process.

         Case 2: Modifications to existing design or process (hopefully there is an FMEA for the existing
         design or process). The scope of the FMEA should focus on the modification to design or
         process, possible interactions due to the modification, and field history.

         Case 3: Use of existing design in a new environment, location or application. The scope of the
         FMEA is the impact of the new environment or location on the existing design.

         The responsible engineer is in charge of ensuring that all recommended actions have been
         implemented and adequately addressed. The FMEA is a living document and should always
         reflect the latest relevant actions including those occurring after the start of production.



4.4.5 Prevention of Defects
         FMEA Implementation (McCoy, 2009)


         The responsible engineer has several means of assuring that recommended actions are
         implemented. They should include, but are not limited to the following:

              a) Reviewing designs, processes and drawings to ensure that recommended actions have
                 been implemented.

              b) Confirming the incorporation of changes to design-, assembly- or manufacturing
                 documentation.



                                                                                              56 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
c) Reviewing design and process FMEAs, special FMEA applications and control plans.

         The figure 4.7 illustrates the difference and the connection of System FMEA, Design FMEA and
         Process FMEA.

         The preferred application method during the Integrated Product Development and Launch
         Processes (PDLP) is flow-down, where the customer requirements cascade down from one
         FMEA level to the next. FMEA is used during the early concept phase, as well as the detailed
         phase, to assess the risk of not delivering a product to the customer with the intended
         functions. It is also a useful means to document the decision-making process, to identify
         potential key characteristics and to identify elements of an analysis and a test plan.

         The flow-up method is commonly used with the Engineering Change process. It is used to
         evaluate changes to existing or new applications for existing systems, products, options, parts or
         processes, as well as a structured problem-solving tool. For Engineering Changes the local
         Engineering Manager may decide whether a System FMEA is needed or if the Severity can be
         determined by the FMEA team.

         The Severity rating should reflect the severity of the highest known FMEA level Failure Effect
         (i.e. the Failure effect in the Process FMEA should be the same words as the Failure Effect of the
         System FMEA).

                                              Figure 4.7: FMEA Development Process (McCoy, 2009)




                                                                                                   57 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
Statistical Process Control


         Statistical Process Control is a methodology for monitoring the process to identify special
         causes of variation and signaling the need to take corrective action , when it is appropriate.
         (Evans, 2008).

         The Key application of SPC is to use control charts for variables that are critical to the product
         and process. Some examples of variables to control fo the coil spring and wire forms are related
         to material and dimensional attributes. For instance the diameter of the wire form and
         tolerances within +/- 1% of the dimension will need to be considered when controlling product
         variables, assuming the automated equipment is very précise. Additional to the product
         dimensions, the calibration of new equipment will also need to be under control for specific
         variables related to the machine operation.




4.4.6 Indentification of Defects
         Design FMEA and its Process counterpart (McCoy, 2009)


         The Design FMEA is a living document and should be initiated before or at design concept
         finalization, be continually updated as changes occur or additional information is obtained
         throughout the phases of product development, and be fundamentally completed before the
         production drawings are released for tooling.

         Considering that manufacturing /assembly needs have been incorporated, the Design FMEA
         addresses the design intent and assumes the design will be manufactured and assembled to this
         intent. Potential failure modes and/or causes or mechanisms which can occur during the
         manufacturing or assembly process might be identified in the Design FMEA, but their
         identification, effect and control are covered by the Process FMEA.
         The Design FMEA does not rely on process controls to overcome potential weaknesses in the
         design, but it does take technical/physical limits of a manufacturing and assembly process into
         consideration, e.g.:

                  Necessary mould drafts.
                  Limited surface finish.
                  Assembling space and access for tooling.
                  Limited harden-ability of steels.
                  Tolerances, process capability, process performance.

         The design FMEA can also take into consideration the technical/physical limits of product
         maintenance (service) and recycling, for example:

                                                                                                58 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
    Tool access
                  Diagnostic capability
                  Material classification symbols (for recycling)


         Statistical Process Control Charts


         SPC control charts have three basic applications:

         1.Establish the state of the statistical control ; 2. To monitor the process and to signal when the
         process goes out of control; 3. To determine the process capability. Figure 4.8 show the steps
         required to develop and use control charts. Figure 4.9 shows the interpretation of points out of
         control for SPC.

                                       Figure 4.5: Control Chart Process (Evans, 2008)



  1. Preparation                        2. Data Collection               3.Determination of
                                                                         trial control limits

       •Choose the                            •Record the data                •Draw the center
        Variable or                           •Calculate relevant              line
        attribute to be                        statistics:                    •Compute the
        measure                                averages, ranges,               lower and upper
       •Determine the                          proportions, and                control limits
        Basis, size and                        so on
        frequency to be                       •Plot the statistics
        measure                                on the chart
       •Setup the control
        chart




  4.Analysis and                       5.Use as a problem               6.Determination of
  Interpretation                       solving tool                     process capability

       •Investigate the                       •Continue data                 •Use control chart
        Chart for Lack of                      collection and                 data
        Control                                plotting                      •Constantly
       •Eliminate out of                      •identify out-of                update and
        control points                         control situations             review process
       •Recompute                              and corrective                 capability
        control limits if                      actions
        necessary




                                                                                                  59 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
Figure 4.6: Control Points InterpretationInvalid source specified. (Machinery, 2010)




                                                                                                          60 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
5 Project Cost Estimate
5.1 Project Cost
5.1.1 Total Project Cost
         Project Cost will be distributed in Labor, Material, Trips, General Administration and
         Contingency, based on our Risk Assessment. Table 5.1 shows Actual Cost at week 14. The
         Baseline Budget and the Forecasted Budget (week 14 + 29 weeks ). Final Project cost is to
         remain the same after the unexpected event, contingency plan cost is to be absorbed by the
         contingency budget.



                                          Table 5.1: Project Cost Status (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)




                                                                                                    61 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
5.1.2 Breakdown of Project Costs
               The WBS shown on figure 5.1 breakdowns the cost in different packages. Estimates for each cost
               package are shown in black figures as the original Baseline Cost Budget; in red as the new
               Modified Baseline Budget and in white as the Actual Cost. There is a new work package added
               to the Procurement Package: Engineering Tooling/Specs Revision is required for new Vendor B’s
               engineering inspection and specifications revision. Materials - the highest account - will be
               broken down in 4 payments: 25 % deposit, 25 % at Shipping, 25% at receives, 25% after
               Installation and Validation once the new contract is signed.


                                                                                       8
                                      Figure 5.1: WBS/ Cost Package Breakdown (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)
                                                        Springs Assembly Line
                                                         Automation Project
                                                            $2,557.608.3
                                                            $2,557,608.3
                                                              $113,157


                  Contingency       General Admi             Project (7)
                  $215,127.0         $109,223.0             $2,253,258.3
                  $131,191.6         $109,223.0             $2,337,193.7
                      $0              $35,561.0              $77,596.25


     Project                    Manufacturing                   Procurement                  Production/Operations
    Planning                     $48,845.3                       $1,353,065                       $781,228.0
    $1,320.0                     $48,845.3                      $1,419,573.1                      $798,655.2
    $1,320.0                     $43,290.3                        $15,585.8
    $1,320.0
                                        Layout                                                    Installation
                                        Design                          Purchasing
                                                                        $19,273.0                  $15,840.0
                                       $8,580.0                                                    $16,128.7
                                       $8,580.0                         $22,485.0
     Preliminary Plan
                                       $8,580.0                         $15,585.8
         $1,320.0
         $1,320.0                    Tools/Equip                                                 Maintenance
         $1,320.0                                                                                  Training
                                       Design
                                      $11,072.0                       New Tool/Specs              $10,032.0
     Communication                    $11,072.0                          Revision                 $10,295.4
         Plan                         $11,072.0                             $0
          $0                                                              $7,392
          $0                        Process Design                                                  Human
          $0                          $10,120.0                                                    Resources
                                      $10,120.0                                                    $11,900.0
                                      $10,120.0                                                    $11,900.0
                                                                          Tooling
                                       Buildout                        Development/
                                       $4,840.0                          Shipping
                                                                                                 MVB Training
                                       $4,840.0                        $1,333,792.0
                                                                                                  $738,396.0
                                       $4,840.0                        $1,389,696.1
                                                                                                  $755,271.0

                                    Manufacturing
                                    Validation Plan                                               Finance Audit
                                      $14,233.3                                                      $5,060.0
                                      $14,233.3                                                      $5,060.0
                                       $8,678.3




8
    The difference of $17,400 in Project Actual Cost (in White) corresponds to Salary of Project Manager up to week 14

                                                                                                                     62 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
5.1.3 Progress Payments
         Monthly payments have been adjusted to the modified payment plan. Table 5.2 shows both the
         baseline and modified baseline payment plans. Figures 5.3 shows the deferred payments from
         the month of August,2010. Vendor change will defer the initial deposit payment for the Wire
         Gauge and Wire Forming equipment. Later installment payments, as agreed in the contract will
         have one month lag time for the first two payments, all corresponding to the action plan
         explained in section 6.

                                         Table 5.2: Monthly Payments (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)




                         Figure 5.2: Progress Payments Chart- Modified (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)




                                                                                                  63 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
5.1.4 Monthly Payment Distribution
         Table 5.3 shows the payments distribution with the baseline modified. Figure 5.3 shows a
         graphical representation of the current payment distribution per month according to the
         modified budget. Notice how the contingency budget will be allocated in the months of August
         and November to accommodate for Vendor Change action plan. Details of weekly payments for
         baseline and modified baseline are shown on Appendix C.

                             Table 5.3: Monthly Payments Allocations- Modified (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)




                             Figure 5.3: Monthly Payments Allocation Chart (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)




                                                                                                      64 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
5.1.5 Earned Value Control
         The Cost will be controlled with Earned Value Methodology. The Cost Performance Index (CPI)
         will float between 0.90 and 1.05. Any deviation from these values needs to call for an Action
         Plan and Project Cost Revision. Figure 5.4 shows the baseline EVA Monthly Plan. Modified
         Baseline EVA Model was forecasted for the remaining of the project, after the unexpected event
         with the supplier selection. Figure 5.5 shows the new values for the EVA control curve. Nnotice
         displacement of the payments for equipment between the Baseline lines and Modified Plans.
         Weekly Plan Values for the modified EVA model are shown on Appendix F.

                                    Figure 5.4: EVA Control Plan- Baseline (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)




                                    Figure 5.5: EVA Control Plan - Modified (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)




                                                                                                       65 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
5.1.6 Control Performance Index (CPI) & Schedule Performance Index (SPI)
         Project was under control with SPI and CPI at 1.0 until the unexpected event happened. Due to
         the unexpected event, there will be a Supplier Selection delay and metrics are affected; SPI
         index went down to 0.91; CPI index remains at 0.99. Both Indicators are in good standing after a
         revision plan is put in place to keep the project on track. The calculations for the CPI and SPI as
         of week 14 are done considering the undergoing action plan for new Wire Gauge Checkers and
         Wire Forming equipment with Vendor B contract.

         Figure 5.6 shows the Actual Cost (AC) and Earned Value (EV), which are the same values except
         for the Cost Variance on week 14 ( CV14=EV14-AC14 = -$739).




         Cost Performance Index (CPI) (PMI, 2010)


         CPI14 = EV14 / AC14 = $112,400 / $113,157 = 0.99


         Schedule Performance Index (SPI) (PMI, 2010)


         SPI14v= EV14/PV14 = $112,400 / $122,259 = 0.91


                                       Figure 5.6: Earned Value Analysis (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)




                                                                                                    66 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
5.1.7 Estimate at Completion (EAC) and Variance at Completion (VAC)
         Estimate at Completion (EAC) is calculated based on the performance of the project thus far.
         Although the Total Budget at Completion (BAC) is pretty much the same as the original baseline
         budget ($2,577,608), the EAC will be our potential completion cost, for statistical purposes. The
         VAC is not even detectable as seen on Figure 5.7. This is considering all the Action Plan Cost was
         absorbed by the Contingency Budget.


         Estimate at Completion (EAC) (PMI, 2010)


         EAC = AC + [(BAC-EV)/CPI] = $117,091 + [($2,577,608 – $116,352)/0.99)] = $2,603,208


         Variance at Completion (VAC) (PMI, 2010)


         VAC = BAC – EAC = $2,577,608 – $2,603,208 = $ (25,600)



                                      Figure 5.7: Estimate at Completion (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)




                                                                                                    67 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
5.2 Customer-Provide Resources
        The main customer is the Department of Production, including the support departments of
        Quality and Engineering. The following list of resources is needed in place in order to operate the
        new equipment, installation and validation process.

                                       Table 5.4: Customer Resources (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)
  Production Floor                  Labor                 Systems             Lab Testing             Office

   Electrical Outlet          Current                SAP-ERP System      Materials Testing      Conference
    110V/240V                   Production              in Place             Equipment               Rooms
   Water Outlets               Operators              Andon System        Dimensional            Training
   Air Outlets                New hires for           for Production       Room                    Rooms
   Epoxy Paint                 Automated               Takt Time           MagnaFlux              Cardstock
   Lights                      Equipment               monitoring           Testing                Printers
   Electric Fans/VAC          Regular Quality         MS Project          Equipment              Ink/Toner
   Forklift –                  Inspection              MS Office          Durability             PC
    Capacity of                                         AutoCAD             Testing
    10,000 lbs loader                                   IGrafx              Equipment
    min                                                 PRTS
   Floor Space
   Simulation Room




                                                                                                     68 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
5.3 Terms and Conditions
         This agreement is made between Automotive Parts, Inc (API) and the Client/Vendor or Vendor
         specified in the project proposal.
         The purpose of the agreement is:
              To ensure that both parties know their roles, rights and responsibilities
              To ensure that the project is successfully completed to the satisfaction of both parties.
              Ensure the Procurement and Installation of new Equipment, Software and hardware is
                 completed in a satisfactory manner
              Terms and Conditions to be included in the Procurement Contract Agreement with
                 Vendors

         Both parties are expected to perform their duties conscientiously and in a professional manner.
         The services, fees, and other non-standard conditions are specified in the project proposal and
         Request for Quotation documents.

         The parties agree:

            1. Basis of Documentation

         The Client/Vendor will provide API with a copy of the software and functional instructions at the
         start of the project. The documentation will be based on this. Changes to the software will incur
         additional costs.

            2. Access to Information


         a. API requires access to one subject matter expert (SME) who can answer questions in a timely
         manner. The SME is specified in the project proposal.
         b. API will work with other members of the Client/Vendor’s/Supplier team as suggested by the
         SME, but ultimate responsibility for the accuracy of information given to API lies with the SME.

            3. Provision of Software /hardware


         a. API warrants to Client/Vendor that any software that API owns and uses for the preparation
         of the documentation will be a legal copy. API will notify the Client/Vendor/Vendor in regards to
         any breach of this warranty.
         b. If the Client/Vendor/Supplier provides any software for API to use, then
         Client/Vendor/Vendor warrants that software will be a legal copy. The Client/Vendor/Vendor
         will notify API in respect of any breach of this warranty.


            4. Provision of Equipment


                                                                                              69 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
a. API will provide its own general purpose computing and office equipment required for the
         production of the documentation, installation and setup of new equipment as express in the
         Customer Provided Resources of the Project Proposal.
         b. If specialized equipment is required, then API may require that this be provided by the
         Client/Vendor/Vendor for the duration of the project.

            5. Approval of Deliverable Items


         To ensure the documentation conforms to the Client/Vendor’s/Vendor’s expectations and that
         the documentation is accurate, the Client/Vendor/Vendor is required at various stages of the
         documentation life cycle to formally approve the deliverable items that are produced (these are
         specified in the project proposal).
         a. API will provide a draft of the item to be approved.
         b. The Client/Vendor/Vendor will evaluate the draft in a timely manner and will provide API with
         a list of required changes.
         c. API will make the modifications that the Client/Vendor/Vendor requires (unless this
         compromises the usability or general quality of the documentation or assembly process) and
         will provide the Client/Vendor/Version with this new version.
         d. Following any modifications, the Client/Vendor/Vendor will do one of the following:
         i. Formally approve the deliverable item in which case it passes to the next stage. Approval can
         be either on paper or by email.
         ii. Ask for a further re-working, which will be at the Client/Vendor’s/Vendor’s expense (unless
         any necessary re-working is due to API’s error).

            6. Errors and Omissions


         The Client/Vendor/Vendor must carefully check all completed documentation. While API takes
         utmost care in the preparation of documentation, API does not accept liability for errors or
         omissions. Payment of the final invoice indicates that the Client/Vendor has confirmed the
         accuracy of the documentation.

            7. Additional Fees


         a. In addition to the Fees specified in the project proposal, the Client/Vendor /Vendor will pay
         API at the agreed rate for:
         i. Additional work required by the Client/Vendor/Vendor which is outside the scope of the
         documentation as defined in the project proposal.
         ii. Changes to the documentation which is required as a result of changes to the software
         functionality or structure of new equipment.
         iii. Changes to documentation at the request of the Client/Vendor/Vendor after the
         Client/Vendor/Vendor has approved a deliverable item (see Approval of Deliverable Items).



                                                                                               70 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
b. There are no fees for normal office consumables, phone calls, printing of drafts and other
         small items.

            8. Timely Disclosure


         a. If API believes that the documentation cannot be finished on time, API will inform the
         Client/Vendor as soon as is reasonably practical.
         b. If the Client/Vendor is in any way unsatisfied with the progress or quality of API’s work, or if
         the software, hardware changes, the Client/Vendor will inform API as soon as is reasonably
         practical.

            9. Early Termination


         a. Either party may terminate the contract at any time if the other party fails to meet its
         obligations specified in these terms and conditions. In such case, prior to termination, the
         innocent party will inform the other party in writing that it is not meeting the agreed obligations
         and that if this is not rectified within five working days, the innocent party will terminate the
         agreement.
         b. If the Client/Vendor is the innocent party, then following this notice, API will rectify the
         matter without expense to the Client/Vendor.
         c. If API is the innocent party, then following this notice, API will not spend time on the project.
         If the matter is rectified, and API continues to work on the project, API will not be liable for any
         delays to the provision of the documentation.
         d. If termination proceeds
         i. Full payment must be made immediately for any invoices already submitted.
         ii. Any other work done (excepting that carried out under clause b), whether or not this is
         complete, must also be paid for. API will charge at the standard rate, as specified in the project
         proposal. API will invoice the Client/Vendor after notification of termination, and this must be
         paid immediately.

            10. Third Party Rights


         These terms and conditions apply between API and the Client/Vendor. No third party as any
         rights under the Contract (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999.


            11. Confidentiality


         All information supplied by either party to the other will be treated in strictest confidence.

            12. Copyright




                                                                                                 71 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
a. On final payment, copyright of the documentation that relates solely to the Client/Vendor’s is
         automatically transferred to API. Prior to this, Client/Vendor retains copyright.
         b. Once copyright is transferred, the Client/Vendor is entitled to change the documentation,
         provided that the changed documentation is not attributed to API.
         c. API retains copyright of all documentation that relates to publicly obtainable products or
         information that resides in the public domain.

            13. Intellectual Property


         a. Any discoveries, inventions or other intellectual property that relate solely to the product will
         be the property of the Client/Vendor.
         b. Any other intellectual property will reside with API.

            14. Law


         This agreement is governed by the laws of New York State.

            15. Circumstances beyond Control


         Neither the Client/Vendor nor API shall be held responsible for circumstances beyond their
         reasonable control.




                                                                                                 72 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
6 Unexpected Event
6.1 Problem
6.1.1 General Description
         The Change Request form below describes the OEM Vendor Change problem.

                               Automotive Parts, Inc Change Request Form
 Change Request: CR#001-2010                                                               Page    1 of 2

 Title: Wire Gauge Checkers/Wire Formers Supplier Selection Delay - Vendor OEM Change Request
 Project Title                    Task No. 1.3.3.1.4            Revision No. 1              Date issued: 08.02.2010
 Automation Wire                  Supplier Selection
 Form/Spring Assembly Line
 Description of change:
 Need to change Equipment OEM vendor for Wire Gauge Checkers/Wire Formers. Initial selected supplier is in a
 financial crisis and will declare bankruptcy.
 Reason for Change:
 Selected Supplier, Electro Measure, is going through financial struggles and will declare bankruptcy, so it won’t be
 able to comply with the current contract and delivery of new equipment. The supplier is currently having
 difficulties paying for materials, payroll and other overheads. Electro Measure has terminated a lot of its staff and
 is very slow in making payments to their parts vendors. It has become difficult for them to even pay their
 electricity and telephone bills. This situation has put the project completion, equipment installation and service at
 risk.
 Documentation attached: Automotive Part Inc, Part 3 – Case Study
 Originated by: Hector A. Rodriguez                                                         Date: 08.02.2010
 Requested logged by: Owen French - CEO                                                     Date: 08.01.2010

 Cost Implications: $84,000
 Schedule Implications: Changes in task activities, additional overtime work. No changes of final project delivery
 date.
 Implications of Performance of Deliverable(s): SPI = 0.91 CPI= 0.99 for week 14
 Other Implications (risks & issues): If we stay with current vendor we could have service and installation
 difficulties even if the equipment is received. Due to the instability of the company, installation and service may
 not be available. Original supplier might be bought by new company in 2 months, or will cease operations within
 the next month. With the new supplier, shipping of new equipment and installation will take longer than previous
 supplier. Robotics and computer equipment will continue their regular fabrication and shipping schedules and are
 not affected by this situation.
 Proposed plan for implementation: Select new vendor, meet with new vendor to review engineering specs and
 drawings, designs. Look into new schedule for supplier selection, Shipping, installation and training. MVB to remain
 the same. A Decision Tree Analysis is recommended to find the best and least costly alternative.
 Implications Evaluated by:                                                                 Date:
 Recommendation: Approve work and contract with Vendor B for Wire Gauge Checkers and Wire Forming
 equipment.
 Recommended by: Bob Jonson                                                                           Date:
 Documentation attached:

 Approved by : French Owen                    Date:           Approved by: Dike Ives                 Date:
                                              08.16.2010                                             08.16.2010


                                                                                                       73 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
6.1.2 Current Status


                                                     API,Inc
                                              Project Status Report
                                 Sourcing/Procurement Review
                                                Contract Sign-off
                                                 August 16, 2010

   Project Name: Automation Wire Form/Spring Assembly Line

   Department: PMO

   Focus Area: Sourcing/ Procurement Review

   Stage Gate Valve: Contract Sign-off

   Product/Process: Wire Gauge Checking, Wire Forming of Springs and Wire Forms



       Prepared By:

    Document Owner(s)                                          Project/Organization Role

    Bob Jonson                                                 Project Manager

    Hector Rodriguez                                           Project Manager

    Lydia Ross                                                 Project Manager


   Project Status Report Summary

            The Project Status Report is a document that Project Managers may use as a means of formal regular reporting on the
            status of a project to key project stakeholders, including the Steering Committee, Project Sponsor, and Senior Manager.

            Project Status summary details are shown below, focusing on milestones, deliverables and budget/cost variances for the
            Reporting Period : Sourcing/Procurement Review




                                                                                                                74 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
Project Name: Automation Springs/Wire Forms Assembly Line
  Prepared By:                                Date:                            Reporting Period:
  Hector A Rodriguez                          08.16.2010                       Sourcing/Procurement Review
                                                                               Week 14


  Project Overall Status:

            Project finished the project planning, design engineering/documentation phases. The Preliminary Plan, Program Initiation
            Review, Manufacturing Engineering Review, and Verify Data Release Review as all were approved with success.

            This will be the evaluation of the Sourcing/Procurement Review or Contract Sign-off

            Project Schedule and Budget are right on track ; SPI= 0.95 and CPI= 0.99




    Sourcing/Procurement Review

            Validates the task for procuring new equipment and materials. Deliverables for Sourcing/Procurement Review:


                             RFQ

                             Bidding Quotations

                             Negotiation Rounds

                             Supplier Selection

                             Purchase Orders

   Budget Report

            Total Budget at Completion (BAC) is not affected, the project budget remains at $2,577,608. The action plan cost - $83,935 -
            will be absorbed by the Contingency Budget, this will be the cost variance for the implementation of this Supplier Selection
            Contingency Plan.

            Given the CPI=0.99 performance at the moment, we are expecting an Estimate at Completion (EAC) of $2,603,208, about
            $25,600 higher than the BAC.




                                                                                                                75 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
Project Risk Management Status

             Human Resource Placement Risk is under control, the proposal for Placement of labor force was accepted on the Verify Data
             Release Review.

             OEM Vendor for Wire Gauge Checkers/Wire Formers is declaring bankruptcy and is putting the Shipping, installation and
             validation of the new assembly line on risk.

             Purchase orders have not been released yet, hence Shipping has not been activated either.

             Once Risk update is necessary in the Risk Matrix: Supplier Selection has move to be a top risk in the current status with a score
             of 3.75 over 5.0.



                                               Risk         Risk
             Risk and Description             Chance       Impact        Risk Score               Change from Last Review


         Supplier Selection – Change           75%            5             3.75           New vendor will require more time and
         of OEM Vendor                                                                      support for fabrication and development
                                                                                            of equipment
                                                                                           New Vendor will require 5% additional
                                                                                            cost on the Pricing of Equipment
                                                                                           Both Equipments Wire Gauge Checker /
                                                                                            Wire Formers have to be procured
                                                                                            together because they are produced
                                                                                            consecutively in sequence
                                                                                           Review Vendor B financials in detail
                                                                                           Ensure Turnkey Installation and Training


  Project Issue Management Status


                                              Project     Target Due         Issue
             Issue and Description            Impact         Date           Status                     Issue Resolution


         1. Delay on Vendor               High           09/01/2010       Open              Start revision of negotiations and contract
         Selection                                                                           agreement with backup vendor B- Prepare
             Selected Vendor is in                                                          purchase order to immediate start of
              financial struggle and                                                         equipment fabrication with vendor B.
              threatening to stop                                                            Implement other equipment fabrication
              fabrication and delivery                                                       and Shipping as modified plan.
              of Wire Gauge                                                                 Vendor B for Wire Gauge Checker and
              Checkers Equipment                                                             Wire Formers should be the same to avoid
                                                                                             system and setups delays and should be
             Change Request
                                                                                             Reviewed by Engineering Department
              CR001.2010 for New
                                                                                            Plan for overtime for Maintenance
              OEM Vendor Selection
                                                                                             Engineering for Equipment Displacement.




                                                                                                                   76 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
2. New Specialized Market        Medium         3 Months         Open              Prepare a preliminary proposal for new
         Penetration                                     after project                       specialized products. See section 7.0
             CEO requested to                           completion                         A preliminary expansion plan will be
              prepare the initial                                                            presented with the new automated
              planning for                                                                   equipment and future market
              expansion projects for                                                         penetrations in other industries and value
              a more specialized                                                             added products.
              product with new                                                          
              automated equipment
             Change Request
              CR002.2010 for Project
              Expansion has been
              issued




  Project Budget Variance


             The Project Budget Variance in Table 6.1 shows the difference between the baseline Budget at Completion and the new
             modified Budget at Completion.

             Justifications for variances are explained according to the action plans for new Supplier Selection.




                                                                                                                    77 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
Table 6.1: Budget at Completion Breakdown (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)

                                                                  Budget              Budget                    Budget Variance
                                 Budget Item                    BAC Modified        BAC Baseline                  Explanation

       1.0     PROJECT SPRINGS                                   $2,577,608          $2,577,608                      $0.00

       1.1     General Administration                            $109,223.00        $109,223.00                      $0.00

                                                                                                                  ($83,935.32)
       1.2     Contingency Budget                                $131,191.68        $215,127.00
                                                                                                             Procurement Action Plan

       1.3     PROJECT                                          $2,337,193.70       $2,253,258.3                  ($83,935.32)

      1.3.1    PROJECT PLANNING                                   $1,320.00          $1,320.00                       $0.00

     1.3.1.1        PRELIMINARY PLAN                              $1,320.00          $1,320.00                       $0.00

     1.3.1.2        COMMUNICATION                                   $0.00              $0.00                         $0.00

      1.3.2    MANUFACTURING                                     $48,845.38          $48,845.38                      $0.00

     1.3.2.1        LAYOUT                                        $8,580.00          $8,580.00                       $0.00

     1.3.2.2        TOOLS EQUIPMENT SPECS                        $11,072.05          $11,072.05                      $0.00

     1.3.2.3        PROCESS                                      $10,120.00          $10,120.00                      $0.00

     1.3.2.4        BUILDOUT                                      $4,840.00          $4,840.00                       $0.00

     1.3.2.5        MANUFACTURING VALIDATION PLAN                $14,233.33          $14,233.33                      $0.00

      1.3.3    PROCUREMENT                                      $1,419,573.12       $1,353,065.0                  ($66,508.12)

                                                                                                                  ($3,212.00)
     1.3.3.1        PURCHASING                                   $22,485.00          $19,273.00        Buyer retake of negotiations and
                                                                                                      contract close out with new Vendor
                                                                                                                  ($7,392.00)
                    NEW TOOLS/
     1.3.3.2                                                      $7,392.00            $0.00         Engineering Revision of New Vendor’s
                    EQUIPMENT SPECS REVISION
                                                                                                                     Specs
                                                                                                                  $55,904.12
     1.3.3.2        TOOLING DEVELOPMENT AND SHIPPING            $1,389,696.12       $1,333,792.0      Additional Pay 5% for New Vendor
                                                                                                               Equipment Price

      1.3.4    PRODUCTION/OPERATIONS                             $798,655.20        $781,228.00                    $17,427.20

                                                                                                                    $288.75
     1.3.4.1        INSTALLATION                                 $16,128.75          $15,840.00
                                                                                                              Overtime Maint. Eng
                                                                                                                    $263.45
     1.3.4.2        MAINTENANCE TRAINING                         $10,295.45          $10,032.00
                                                                                                              Overtime Maint. Eng

     1.3.4.3        HUMAN RESOURCES                              $11,900.00          $11,900.00                      $0.00

                                                                                                                  $16,875.00
                    MANUFACTURING/OPERATIONS
     1.3.4.4                                                     $755,271.00        $738,396.00       Additional Pay 5% for New Vendor
                    VALIDATION-TRAINING
                                                                                                               Equipment Price

     1.3.4.5        FINANCE                                       $5,060.00          $5,060.00                       $0.00




                                                                                                                78 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
6.2 Alternative Solutions
6.2.1 Overview
         The Project status as of Week 14 shows that an action plan for Supplier Selection must be in
         place in order to set the project back on Schedule. The CPI and SPI index are well under control
         but require special action to avoid future stoppage of the Project. Vendor A has been going
         through financial difficulties and is soon to declare bankruptcy putting the fabrication and
         delivery of new automated equipment at risk.

         This section will explain possible alternatives and the decisions to consider for the remaining of
         the project. Three scenarios will be evaluated for its probability of happening and cost impact. A
         decision tree will be calculated for the expected cost and the lowest cost will drive to a more
         intelligent decision.

6.2.2 Continuing Contract
         In this case scenario API, Inc will remain and stay with the contract with Electro Measure,
         knowing there is a high risk the company will declare bankruptcy. After talking to the
         representative of Electro Measure they told us there is a 95% probability that the company will
         cease operations in the next month. If we decide to continue with Electro Measure and keep
         the purchase of new equipment as planned, we might have to make pay the deposit within the
         next month as agreed in the payment terms. The deposit will release the production order for
         the fabrication of the Wire Gauge Checkers and Wire Forming Equipment.

         If the Electro Measure ceases operations in the next month, we will be losing the payment
         deposit and additional contingency cost, our total cost will be $623,000. The Project could be
         delayed for approximately 2-4 months.

         There is a 5% chance Electro Measures receives some financial assistance and gets back on its
         operations, keeping the business open, hence the additional cost will refer only to delay in
         supplier selection and contingency plan of $84,000.

6.2.3 Contract Modification
         In conversations with the Directors and Owners of Electro Measure, it was stated there is a
         possibility that a new company will absorb the debt and buy Electro Measure to make it more
         efficient and operative. They won’t know of this sale/buy decision until the next 2 months from
         week 14 of the project.

         If the company gets bought there is a 20% probability to continue with the project, activating
         the contingency plan for an additional cost of $84,000. The contingency will be used to revise
         contract terms and engineering development with the new company. However, we don’t know



                                                                                               79 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
if the new company will keep the current Product Line up, therefore exist a risk to training and
         the service of the equipment.

         If the company does not get bought within the next 2 month period, which is an 80%
         probability, Electro Measure will be forced to cease operations completely. We could be losing
         about $1,141,674 for the payments of equipment and labor according to contract and project
         Planned Value and will need an additional $84,000 for a recovery plan to finish the project. This
         will total about $1,224,674 in additional cost.

6.2.4 Pursuing another OEM
         The Third option is to change the Vendor. We already explained that as part of the risk
         assessment, a backup Vendor plan was considered. The purchasing team has already negotiated
         some pricing terms with Vendor B. This change will include an $84,000 contingency plan to
         activate the change of vendor and completion of project on time and budget.

         Considering the selection criteria and score results for Vendor B, we estimate a 95% change to
         continue the operations of the project and complete it on time and within the budget. There is
         still a 5% chance that Vendor B will enter into some kind of financial situation, although it has be
         in operations for over 40 years. This risk represents about $1,485,867, assuming this happens
         when all equipment is already installed.

         One major risk still exists in the project’s progress. Shipping of equipment over the Fall-Winter
         season can delay the project and activate an additional resource to complete the project on
         time. The full contingency of $215,127 will be used to add for overtime if necessary for the
         maintenance, training and manufacturing validation and to complete the project within 1-3
         months of the propose deadline. At this point we are assuming Vendor B is in good standing
         with the project.



6.3 Proposed Action
         There are three possible alternatives. Alternative 1: keeping the current contract; Alternative 2:
         Modify the Contract and wait for Electro Measure to be sold; Alternative 3: Change the OEM
         Vendor. A decision tree will be use to estimate each alternative’s cost and potential lost.

         Outcomes calculations are shown on Figure 6.1, with the respective probability of the
         occurrence and the potential cost to the project at the moment of the occurrence. Expected
         Value for the alternative is then calculated, giving a more accurate estimation of potential lost
         for each alternative. Alternative 3 seems to be the least costly of the three options. Action Plan
         Activities for alternative 3 are developed in the next section.




                                                                                                80 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
Figure 6.1: Decision Tree - Supplier Change Cost Analysis (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)



                                                                  Bankrupt- Closing @
                                                                       1 Month                       $591,850
                                   Alternative 1                     95%, $623,000
                                                                                                                                     +             $596,050
                                  Continue with
                                    Contract                         Stay Operative
                                                                    Recovery Package                  $4,200
                                                                      5%, $84,000


                                                                  Bankrupt - No Sale@
                                                                       2 Months                      $913,339
                                                                    80% , $1,141,000
Supplier Change                    Alternative 2
   Request                       Modify Contract                                                                                                    $930,139
                                                                                                                                     +
                                                                   Stay Operative-Sold
                                                                                                      $16,800
                                                                      20% , $84,000


                                                                  Going Bankrupt
                                                                                                                                   $74,293
                                                                  5% 1,485,867
                                                                                                                                     +
                                   Alternative 3
                                   Change OEM                                                   Shipping Delays
                                                                                                                                   $139,832        $243,595
                                                                                                65%, $215,127
                                                                  Stay Operative
                                                                                                                                     +
                                                                        95%
                                                                                               Shipping on Time
                                                                                                                                   $29,400
                                                                                                 35%, $84,000




                                                                                                                                              81 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
Action Plan Activities for Vendor Change


Supplier Selection Delay
– CR#001-2010                   Purchasing Work Package
                               Tasks 1.3.3.1.4
Sourcing/Procurement           Purchasing will required 15 days to finish additional negotiations and contract
Review                         agreements with Backup Vendor ( as explained in the Risk Assessment)
                               Wire Gauge Checkers/Wire Formers equipment must be the same according to
                               Engineering Requirements.
                               New Vendor must provide both equipment to synchronize systems and setup.

                               New Tools/ Equipment Specs Revision Package
                               Tasks 1.3.3.2.1 / 1.3.3.2.2/1.3.3.2.3/1.3.3.2.4
                               Engineering will review new vendor’s specs to validate process and production system
                               design. Additional hours will be planned in parallel to purchasing the Contract Revision
                               with the new Vendor.

                               Tooling Development Work Package
                               Tasks 1.3.3.2.1 /1.3.3.2.2
                               Equipment Manufacturing will be split in: Manufacture of Wire Gauge Checker/Wire
                               Formers (Vendor 1) and Manufacture of Robotics Welders (Vendor 2) and Other
                               Computer hardware (Vendor 3) equipment which will keep same planned schedule.
                               New time for Vendor 1 Manufacturing and Packing is 20 days.

                               Tasks 1.3.3.2.3 / 1.3.3.2.4 / 1.3.3.2.5
                               Shipping will remain the same for Vendor 2 and Vendor 3 for Robots and Computers,
                               respectively. Shipping for Wire Gauge/Wire Formers will be delayed after fabrication
                               of new equipment. Shipping is to take 40 days as already planned.

                              Installation Work Package
                               Task 1.3.4.1.3
                               Installation and Setup of Wire Gauge/Wire Formers will need to be moved after arrival
                               of equipment. Activity time remains within 10 days.

                               Task 1.3.4.1.4
                               Displacement of Old Equipment for Robotics needs to be planned for overtime to
                               reduce time by 5 days to avoid overloading the Maintenance Engineer

                              Maintenance Installation Work Package
                               Task 1.3.4.1.5/1.3.4.1.6
                               Training and Setup of Computers and Robotics will have same timing- 10 days - but
                               planned after Displacement of old equipment

                               Tasks 1.3.4.2.1 /1.3.4.2.2/1.3.4.2.3/1.3.4.2.4
                               Training and System Calibration of equipments will remain with same timing – 10 Days,
                               but will move according to predeceasing activities. Human Resource and
                               Manufacturing Validation Work Packages remain unchanged.




                                                                                                          82 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
7 Scope Expansion
7.1 Project Description
         The automation of API’s manufacture of coil springs, wire forms and sub-assemblies will
         increase the capacity of the company to produce additional products with new dimensions and
         specifications. The company’s capacity to produce its products at a faster rate of speed will
         almost double, leaving an opportunity to acquire new business and increase its product line.
         The CEO, Owen French has therefore expanded the automation project to include new business.
         The increased business will include specialty areas such as aircraft and aerospace companies,
         government contractors making ships, tanks and other military vehicles. The expansion project
         has been presented as an addition to the existing automation project in order to be ready for
         new business soon after the automation of the company has been completed.

         In order to achieve the goal of new customers for specialty items, the project management
         office along with marketing is developing strategies on breaking into the new market. To this
         end, project management along with the Engineering Department is researching the physical
         and material specifications required for the springs and wire forms used by companies in this
         market. In addition, project management has designed some short pilot production of the
         potential products that include prototypes of the new products. Since new raw materials are
         needed in the production of the specialty wire forms, new material suppliers are also being
         obtained. The project team and supporting organization formed for the expansion of the
         automation project is listed in figure 7.1 below.

        Table 7.1 summarizes some details about the Project Expansion for new product development.


                                              Table 7.1: Project Expansion Summary



                              Client/Vendor name                  Aerospace/Defense

                        Client/Vendor’s administrator             PMO - Engineering
                                                                  New Product Development Program
                                  Project name
                                                                  for Wire Forms/ Springs
                             Engagement duration                  66 Weeks
                                                                             th
                                   Begin date                     August 30 , 2010
                                                                              th
                                     End date                     January 16 , 2012




                                                                                                    83 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
Figure 7.1: Program Expansion Team (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)




                                                                  Project Manager



                                                        Dick Ives Project
                                                            Planning
                                                            Director

Sales and                                                                                                                             Director of
                              Director of                                           Director of                      Director of
Marketing                                                                                                                               Human
                              Engineering                                           Operations                         Supply
 Director                                                                                                                              Resource

   Marketing         Manufact               Product
                                                                                    Materials        Production
   Research         Engineering           Engineering       Quality Manager                                                Buyer(2)      HR Specialist
                                                                                    Manager           Manager
   Specialist        Manager               Manager


                                               Product                                   Materials       Production
  Salesperson         Facility Engineer                         Quality Engineer
                                               Engineer                                  Engineer     Supervisor Shift 2


                         Industrial                                                                    Maintenance
                                            Testing Engineer
                         Engineer                                                                       Engineer


                                                                                                           Safety
                         Systems
                                                                                                        Ergonomics
                         Engineer
                                                                                                         Spervisor


                       Manufacturing                                                                   Subassembly
                         Engineer                                                                       Operators


                         Process                                                                                                       Key
                         Engineer
                                                                                                                                                    Project
                                                                                                                                                     Team




                                                                                                                               84 | P a g e
     Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
7.2 Initial Planning
         The initial planning of this project was to determine the exact wire forms to develop. In order
         to determine this information a marketing research specialist has been employed to review the
         current market and determine which wire forms are in the most demand. Also, research is
         being conducted with government agencies such as NASA and the Office of Defense to acquire
         government contracts to supply the specialty items. Marketing is also reviewing specialty items
         that the new equipment can produce but are not being supplied in order to gain a market share
         in these new industries.

         In terms of ensuring the company can produce the new products to customer specification, one
         of the items or indexes that will be tracked is the process capacity. Being in control of a
         manufacturing process using statistical process control (SPC) is not enough. An "in-control"
         process can produce bad or out-of-spec product. Manufacturing processes must meet or be able
         to achieve product specifications. Further, product specifications must be based on customers’
         requirements.

         Process capability is the repeatability and consistency of a manufacturing process relative to the
         customer requirements in terms of specification limits of a product parameter. This measure is
         used to objectively measure the degree to which your process is or is not meeting the
         requirements. Capability indices have been developed to graphically portray that measure.
         Capability indices let you place the distribution of your process in relation to the product
         specification limits. Capability indices should be used to determine whether the process, given
         its natural variation, is capable of product with the given processes.

         Capability indices can be used to compare the product/process matches and identify the
         poorest match (lowest capability). The poorest matches then can be targeted on a priority basis
         for improvement. Figure 7.2 and Table 7.2 show the process needed to ensure the success of
         the new product development. The purpose of the process is "to produce a product quality
         plan which will support development of a product or service that will satisfy the customer." It
         does this by focusing on:

        Up-front quality planning
        Evaluating the output to determine if customers are satisfied & support continual improvement




                                                                                               85 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
Figure 7.2: Product Development Process (NPD-Solutions)




         A further indication of the process is to examine the process outputs by phase. This is shown in
         the table 7.2 below:

                                              Table 7.2: Phases and Deliverables (NPD-Solutions)




                                                                                                    86 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
7.3 Scope
          Marketing Research
           The scope of the original project to automate the coil spring, wire form and welding of sub-
           assembly specialty products has expanded to new product development of aerospace coil
           spring, wire forms and sub-assemblies as well as government contracts for ships, tanks and
           other military vehicles. In order to ensure the company has the ability to mass produce these
           type of forms, the sales and marketing organizations have been employed to get the dimensions
           and specifications of coil springs, wire forms and sub-assemblies as well as the design and
           material requirements to meet the customer’s needs. Table 7.3 describes some of the task to
           be undertaken during the marketing process for API to meet the needs of new customers.
                                                                                       9
                             Table 7.3: Marketing Research Analysis Worksheet
                             ID                                  Package / Tasks
                             1.0              Marketing Research Tactical Plan


                             1.1              Scope Definition Phase
                             1.1.1            Define research objectives
                             1.1.2            Define research requirements
                             1.1.3            Determine in-house resource or hire vendor

                             1.2              Vendor Selection Phase
                             1.2.1            Define vendor selection criteria
                             1.2.2            Develop vendor selection questionnaire
                             1.2.3            Develop Statement of Work
                             1.2.4            Evaluate proposal
                             1.2.5            Select vendor

                             1.3              Research Phase
                             1.3.1            Develop market research information needs questionnaire
                             1.3.2            Interview marketing group for market research needs
                             1.3.3            Document information needs
                             1.3.4            Identify information to be gathered in research
                             1.3.5            Identify source of information
                             1.3.6            Identify research method (primary or secondary)
                             1.3.7            Identify research participant
                             1.3.8            Identify research technique (focus group or survey)
                             1.3.9            Identify timing requirements and budget
                             1.3.10           Develop research plan
                             1.3.11           Develop research information gathering tool
                             1.3.12           Conduct research
                             1.3.13           Document research findings
                             1.3.14           Develop research report
                             1.3.15           Review report with marketing group

9
    Microsoft Excel Template: Marketing Research Tactical Plan

                                                                                                        87 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
The Marketing Research department will conduct research to determine the market's needs and
         how and who is currently servicing it to understand the marketing share of the new products
         and how to position the company to acquire a portion of the market. The marketing research
         will also allow the company to analyze the current market, gain a competitive advantage and
         establish a marketing plan.

         Some of the questions that will be answered by the sales and marketing department include the
         following:

              1.    What defined market is being targeted?
              2.    What specific companies are servicing this market?
              3.    Are they successful?
              4.    Are there other companies servicing this market with a similar product?
              5.    Are they successful?
              6.    What is their market share?
              7.    Is the market saturated or wide open? If so, why?
              8.    What is the size of the market?
              9.    Is it a growing market?
              10.   Is the industry stable, volatile, growing or trendy?
              11.   How can I reach this market?
              12.   How do API’s competitors reach the market?
              13.   What are the business models of the competitors?
              14.   What do customers expect from this type of product or service?
              15.   What core competencies must the product or service have?
              16.   What are customers willing to pay for this type of product or service?
              17.   What is my competitive advantage?

         One of the most important questions that needed to be answered was defining the market and
         making sure API could supply the targeted market with what they needed. Since API has been in
         the coil spring industry for some time, the company has background experience on producing
         the product. The area of uncertainty lies in the new product development and the ability of the
         automated equipment to correctly produce the new products in large quantities with low reject
         rates.

         In addition to the research, the marketing department will need to conduct a new product sales
         forecast to determine the financial impact to the company by going into the new market.




                                                                                              88 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
New Product Development - Program Management


          Three new products will be launched over the course of the next seventeen months. The first
          launch will be for a new coil springs for military tanks. The next launch will be wire forms for
          NASA aerospace equipment, and the last launch will be subassemblies for the military
          applications of the department of Defense.

          The launch of coil springs and wire forms will include the procurement of new raw materials.
          For the subassembly project a new tooling and equipment design, development and installation
          is required. Also, consignment parts for subassembly will be procured and produce in a
          specialized subassembly cell. A summary of the program scope terms is shown on table 7.4.


                                              Table 7.4: Program Scope Summary
            Wire Forms Aerospace                   Coil Spring Military Tanks                     Subassembly Defense
          Market Research                        Market Research                              Market Research
          Procurement of Raw Materials           Procurement of Raw                           Procurement of consignment
          Process Engineering Design              Materials                                     parts
          New Product Specs and                  Process Engineering Design                   Tooling/Jigs Development
           Requirements                           New Product Specs and                        Equipment Development
          Product Engineering Design              Requirements                                 Process Engineering Design
          Validation Engineering                 Product Engineering Design                   Product Engineering Design
          Manufacturing Validation               Validation Engineering                       Validation Engineering
          Sales/Advertising                      Manufacturing Validation                     Manufacturing Validation
                                                  Sales/Advertising                            Sales/Advertising




7.4 Schedule
          The Initial Schedule for the Product Development Program is divided into three product
          development projects: Project #1: Wire Forms Aerospace ; Project #2: Coil for Tanks Defense;
          Project #3: Subassemblies Defense.

                                       Table 7.5: Program Summary Schedule


                                       Project                              Completion date
                                                                                       th
                  1. Wire Forms Aerospace                                        June 8 , 2011
      .           2.Coil for Tanks Defense
                                                                                            st
                                                                                 August 1 , 2011
                                                                                             th
                  3.Subassemblies Defense                                       January 16 , 2012




                                                                                                               89 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
Each project will be planned with some separation to have a production learning curve. Project
         #1 and Project #2 are very similar in schedule and cost, while Project #3 requires additional
         resources, time and cost since it will be a new production development, new equipment and
         tooling. Figure 7.3 shows the progress of each project through the Sales( yellow) , Engineering (
         fuchsia) , Procurement ( green) , Validation ( aqua ) , Human Resources ( red) and Regular
         Production Packages. Detailed Schedules of each project are shown on Appendix I.

                           Figure 7.3: Product Development Program Schedule (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)




                                                                                                  90 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
7.5 Budget
7.5.1 Schedule of Rates - Labor
           Labor cost is calculated for the Salary workers only. Production workers who will participate in
           projects #1 and #2 won’t be considered as part of the Project Budget, but of regular production
           overhead. Additional Production force is to be hired for Project #3.


                                  Table 7.6: Program Schedule of Rates (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)
                                                   Wire Forms                Coil for Tanks            Subassemblies
                                                    Aerospace                  Defense                    Defense
 Item description        Qty       Avg.       Delivery       Cost       Delivery         Cost     Delivery        Cost
                                   Rate       schedule     Baseline     schedule       Baseline   schedule      Baseline
                                               (Man -                    (Man -                    (Man -
                                               hours)                    hours)                    hours)
Process Engineer          1       $33.00/h     257.3         $8,492.0    257.3         $8,492.0    293.3              $9,680.0

Manufacturing             1       $33.00/h     106.6         $3,520.0     264          $8,712.0    594.6             $19,624.0
Engineer
Quality Engineer          1       $33.00/h     104.0         $3,432.0    173.33        $5,720.0    173.3              $5,720.0

Buyer                     1       $33.00/h     318.8        $10,520.4    327.87       $10,819.6    327.8             $10,819.6

Buyer 2                   1       $33.00/h                                                         238.6              $7,876.0

Supplier                  1       $0.00/h      344.0             $0.0     344              $0.0    1220                   $0.0

Production Manager        1       $35.00/h     104.0         $3,640.0    173.33        $6,066.6    173.3              $6,066.6

Testing Engineer          1       $33.00/h     211.0         $6,963.0     210          $6,930.0     211               $6,963.0

Marketing Specialist      1       $33.00/h     668.0        $22,044.0    333.33       $11,000.0    333.3             $11,000.0

Salesperson               1       $33.00/h     480.0        $15,840.0     480         $15,840.0     480              $15,840.0

Product Engineer          1       $33.00/h     362.6        $11,968.0     432         $14,256.0    501.3             $16,544.0

HR Specialist             1       $28.00/h                                                         320.0               $8,960

Maintenance Engineer      1       $33.00/h                                                         306.6             $10,120.0

Subassembly               5       $15.86/h                                                         866.85            $13,747.4
Operators

Totals                   18                     2,956.3   $86,419.4     2,995.16    $87,836.2       6,039.9    $142,960.6




                                                                                                      91 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
7.5.2 Equipment and Materials
         As part of the equipment and materials we are procuring new wire materials for new product
         development, consignment parts for subassembly testing; additional marketing/advertising and
         sales development materials.

                                Table 7.7: Program Equipment and Material Cost (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)

                                                                        Wire Forms             Coil Tanks          Subassemblies
                                                                        Aerospace               Defense               Defense
                                                                       Cost Baseline          Cost Baseline         Cost Baseline
              Item description          Quantity      Rate/unit
           Name Registration                                                   $500.0
           Wire Materials for                 160       $5/ft                  $800.0                $800.0                 $800.0
           Prototype
           Wire Materials for                 2,500     $5/ft                $12,500.0             $12,500.0
           Manufacturing Validation
           Build
           Marketing Materials                                                 5,500.0

           Website Update                                                      2,500.0

           Consignment Parts                                                                                              35,000.0
           ( Inventory for Prototype
           and Validation)
           Tooling Development                                                                                            55,000.0
           New Equipment                                                                                                  55,000.0
           Development (air guns,
           torque guns, etc)
           Totals                                                           $21,800.0             $13,300.0            $145,800.0

7.5.3 General Administration, Contingency, Others
         Contingency budget accounts will need a deeper risk assessment review . General
         Administration Cost include overhead of the operation allocated to the expansion project only.

                       Table 7.8: Program General Admin, Contingency, Other Costs (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)

                                                                Wire Forms         Coil Tanks        Subassemblies
                                                                Aerospace           Defense             Defense
                    Item Description                               Cost               Cost                Cost
                                                                 Baseline           Baseline            Baseline
                    General Administration                      $11,321.9          10,613.6             27,175.3
                    Trips                                       $5,000.0           5,000.0               6,500
                    Contingency                                 $33,407.0         $37,779.7             $42,587
                    Totals                                      $49,728.9         $53,393.3            $76,262.3




                                                                                                                   92 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
7.5.4 Summary of Total Cost
         Total cost for New Product Development Projects are shown in table 7.6. The three projects for
         Aerospace, Defense and Subassemblies will total $654,793.3.
         The projects will require 10,804 hours for 10 Engineers and 2 Buyers.



                                       Table 7.9: Total Program Cost (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)




                                                                                                93 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
Figure 7. 4 shows the cost distribution for each project and the total of the new product development
program.

 Project# 1 and Project #2: Wire Forms for Aerospace and Defense, has a very similar cost structure for
labor and materials.

Project 3: Subassemblies for Defense is the most costly and requires additional investment in materials,
mainly production equipment and tooling. For this reason Project # 3, will be delivered later on the
Program Plan, given it will be a new production operation for API, Inc.



                               Figure 7.4: Program Cost Distribution (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)




                                                                                                94 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
7.5.5 WBS/ Cost Breakdown
WBS Chart Pro serves to show ( on figures 7.5, 7.6 and 7.7 ) the WBS and Cost Breakdown for each of the project’s work packages.

                                              Figure 7.5 : WBS/Cost Project # 1 : Wire Forms Aerospace (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)




                                                                                                                                  95 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
Figure 7.6: WBS/Cost Project #2 : Coil for Tank Defense (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)




                                                                                                                                 96 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
Figure 7.7: WBS/Cost Project #3: Subassemblies Defense (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)




                                                                                                                                97 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
8 Appendixes
8.1 Appendix A – Risk Assessment Matrix
            Risk Assessment Matrix




                                              98 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
99 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
8.2 Appendix B – Schedule of Rates
                Detailed Schedule of Rates


RESOURCE NAME                 QUANTITY HOURS           Overtime Total hours STANDARD RATE     Overtime Rate      LABOR COST

Professional Staff

Project Manager                  1             1720         -            1720        $40.00             $50.00   $     68,800.00

Finance Auditor                  1            193.33        -           193.33       $33.00             $41.25   $      6,379.89

Facility Engineer                1              160        80.00          240        $33.00             $41.25   $      8,580.00

Industrial Engineer              1            153.33        -           153.33       $33.00             $41.25   $      5,059.89

Process Engineer                 1            255.07       54.00        309.07       $33.00             $41.25   $     10,644.81

Manufacturing Engineer           1            226.67        -           226.67       $33.00             $41.25   $      7,480.11

Quality Engineer                 1            153.33        -           153.33       $33.00             $41.25   $      5,059.89

Buyer                            1            179.75       81.00        260.75       $33.00             $41.25   $      9,273.00

Supplier                         1              516        40.00          556         $0.00             $41.25   $      1,650.00

Maintanance Engineer             1              472         -             472        $33.00             $41.25   $     15,576.00

Production Manager               1             73.33        -            73.33       $35.00             $43.75   $      2,566.55

HR Specialist                    1            566.67        -           566.67       $28.00             $35.00   $     15,866.76

Material Handling Engineer       1             50.87       27.00         77.87       $33.00             $41.25   $      2,792.46

System Engineer                  1            368.67       20.00        388.67       $33.00             $41.25   $     12,991.11

Testing Engineer                 1              168         -             168        $33.00             $41.25   $      5,544.00

Production Supervisor            2              300         -             600        $28.00             $35.00   $     16,800.00

Manufacturing Engineer 2         1             90.67            40      130.67       $33.00             $41.25   $      4,642.11

Subtotal Professional Staff       18.00                              6,289.69                                    $   199,706.58




RESOURCE NAME                 QUANTITY HOURS           Overtime Total hours STANDARD RATE     Overtime Rate      LABOR COST

Operations Staff

Guage Operator (1)               2              300                       600 $       13.46                      $      8,076.00

Wire Forming Operators (1)       5              300                      1500 $       15.86                      $     23,790.00

Wire Forming Operators (2)       5              300                      1500 $       17.45                      $     26,175.00

Welders Operators (1)            2              300                       600 $       16.82                      $     10,092.00

Welders Operators (2)            2              300                       600 $       18.50                      $     11,100.00

Subtotal Operations Staff         16.00                              4,800.00                                    $    79,233.00




                                                                                                              100 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
RESOURCE NAME                QUANTITY HOURS         Overtime Total hours STANDARD RATE      Overtime Rate    LABOR COST

Current Operation
Checkers                        8             300                   2400 $         12.00                     $       28,800.00

Inspector                       3             300                    900 $         16.34                     $       14,706.00

Wire Forming Operators (1)      10            300                   3000 $         14.90                     $       44,700.00

Wire Forming Operators (2)      8             300                   2400 $         16.34                     $       39,216.00

Wire Forming Operator (3)       4             300                   1200 $         17.30                     $       20,760.00

Welding 1                       5             300                   1500 $         16.34                     $       24,510.00

Welding 2                       3             300                    900 $         17.78                     $       16,002.00

Welding 3                       1             300                    300 $         18.75                     $        5,625.00

Subtotal Current Operation       42.00                         12,600.00                                     $     194,319.00

Labor Cost Total                                                                                                   $473,258.58




              Materials, Equipment, Administration Cost


RESOURCE NAME                QUANTITY HOURS         Overtime Total hours STANDARD RATE      Overtime Rate    LABOR COST

Equipment Cost

1 Computer Terminal                  5                                     $     2,000.00                    $       10,000.00

Wire Gauge Checkers                  2                                     $   150,000.00                    $      300,000.00

Wire Forming CNC                     5                                     $   210,000.00                    $     1,050,000.00

Welding Robotics                     2                                     $   205,000.00                    $      410,000.00


Subtotal Equipment Cost                                                                                      $ 1,770,000.00



RESOURCE NAME                QUANTITY HOURS         Overtime Total hours STANDARD RATE      Overtime Rate    LABOR COST

Admin Cost

Travel                               1                                     $    10,000.00                    $       10,000.00

Subtotal Travel                                                                                                  $2,253,258.58

Contingency                          1                                     $   180,260.69                    $      215,127.00

Subtotal Contingency                 1                                                                           $2,468,385.58

General Administration                                                                                       $      111,324.00

FINAL TOTAL                                                                                                      $2,579,709.58




                                                                                                            101 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
8.3 Appendix C – Weekly Payments Progress
                           Detailed Weekly Payments

                                                                                                   Fixed - Materials                   Contingency
  WBS                                Activity                 Month      Week     Closing Date                          Labor Cost
                                                                                                         Cost                             Cost
1.3.1.1.1    PROJECT SCHEDULE                                             3      5/19/2010 9:20         $0.00             $0.00           $0.00
1.3.1.1.2    WBS                                                          3      5/19/2010 9:20         $0.00             $0.00           $0.00
1.3.1.2.1    ORG. CHART/TEAM                                              4     5/25/2010 15:40         $0.00             $0.00           $0.00
                                                                May
1.3.1.2.3    STAGE GATE PLAN                                              4     5/25/2010 15:40         $0.00             $0.00           $0.00
1.3.1.1.3    PROJECT COST/EVA                                             4      5/26/2010 9:20         $0.00           $1,320.00         $0.00
1.3.1.1.4    RISK MATRIX                                                  4      5/26/2010 9:20         $0.00             $0.00           $0.00
1.3.1.2.2    RESPONSIBILITY MATRIX                                        5      6/1/2010 12:00         $0.00             $0.00           $0.00
1.3.1.4      PROGRAM INITIATION REVIEW                                    5      6/3/2010 8:00          $0.00             $0.00           $0.00
1.3.2.1.1    FACILITY LAYOUT DESIGN                                       7     6/16/2010 17:00         $0.00           $4,290.00       $1,120.00
                                                               June
1.3.2.2.1    AUTOMATION REQUIREMENT AND SPECS. DEVELOPMENT                8     6/25/2010 10:52         $0.00           $2,792.35        $60.85
1.3.2.6      MANUFACUTRING ENGINEERING REVIEW                             9      6/28/2010 8:00         $0.00             $0.00           $0.00
1.3.2.1.2    CONSTRUCTION PLAN AND REQUIREMENTS                           9     6/30/2010 17:00         $0.00           $4,290.00       $1,120.00
1.3.2.2.2    TOOLING DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT                               10     7/5/2010 14:44         $0.00           $2,792.35        $60.85
1.3.2.2.4    MATERIAL HANDLING TOOLS/HANGERS DESIGN                       11     7/14/2010 8:36         $0.00           $2,792.35        $60.85
1.3.2.2.3    COMPUTER HARWARE/NETWORK DESIGN                    July      11    7/14/2010 15:24         $0.00           $2,695.00        $93.33
1.3.2.5.2    HUMAN RESOURCE PLACEMENT PLAN                                11     7/16/2010 9:20         $0.00           $6,533.33       $1,993.33
1.3.3.1.1    RFP                                                          12     7/23/2010 9:16       $5,000.00         $7,792.35        $60.85
1.3.2.7      VERIFY DATA RELEASE REVIEW                                   14     8/2/2010 8:00          $0.00             $0.00           $0.00
1.3.3.1.2    BIDDING                                                      14     8/2/2010 13:08         $0.00           $2,792.35        $60.85
1.3.2.4.1    INSTALLATION PLAN/ PRODUCTION PLAN                           15     8/10/2010 9:04         $0.00           $4,840.00       $373.33
1.3.2.3.1    SOP's AND ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTION SHEETS                        15    8/10/2010 16:44         $0.00           $5,060.00       $1,306.67
1.3.2.3.2    SIMULATION OF PRODUCTION                                     15    8/10/2010 16:44         $0.00           $5,060.00       $1,306.67
                                                              August
1.3.3.1.3    NEGOTIATIONS                                                 15    8/11/2010 11:29         $0.00           $2,940.30       $690.20
1.3.3.3      SOURCING/PROCUREMENT REVIEW                                  16    8/15/2010 17:00         $0.00             $0.00           $0.00
1.3.3.1.4    SUPPLIER SELECTION                                           16    8/16/2010 10:09       $5,000.00         $5,748.00        $37.33
1.3.2.5.1    MANUFACTURING VALIDATION PLAN                                17    8/24/2010 16:44         $0.00           $2,640.00       $1,120.00
1.3.3.2.1    EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURE-PACKING                                18    8/31/2010 13:49      $442,500.00       $448,792.00      $1,941.33
1.3.2.5.3    QUALITY/ENGINEERING PRODUCT TESTING PLAN        September    19     9/7/2010 9:04          $0.00           $5,060.00       $186.67
1.3.3.2.2    COMPUTER SHIPPING                                            24    10/11/2010 15:09      $5,000.00         $5,000.00       $1,000.00
1.3.3.2.3    EQUIPMENT WIRE GAUGE/WIRE FORMING SHIPPING       October     26    10/26/2010 13:49     $675,000.00       $675,000.00      $3,000.00
1.3.4.1.1    DISPLACE OF OLD EQUIPMENT                                    26    10/29/2010 17:00        $0.00           $2,640.00       $1,120.00
1.3.4.1.2    INSTALLATION OF WIRING/COMPUTER                              28    11/12/2010 17:00        $0.00           $2,640.00       $1,624.00
1.3.4.6      PRODUCTION/OPERATIONS DEVELOPMENT REVIEW                     29    11/15/2010 8:00         $0.00             $0.00           $0.00
                                                             November
1.3.4.2.3    SYSTEM CALIBRATION AND SETUP WIRE FORMING                    30    11/26/2010 12:00        $0.00           $2,508.00       $1,560.00
1.3.4.1.3    INSTALLATION/SETUP WIRE GAUGE/ WIRE FORMING                  30    11/26/2010 17:00        $0.00           $2,640.00       $1,896.00
1.3.4.2.1    TRAINING ON WIRE GAUGE/WIRE FORMING EQUIPMENT                32    12/10/2010 12:00        $0.00           $2,508.00       $1,560.00
1.3.3.2.4    EQUIPMENT ROBOTICS SHIPPING                     December     33    12/21/2010 13:49     $205,000.00       $205,000.00      $3,000.00
1.3.4.1.4    DISPLACE OF OLD EQUIPMENT                                    33    12/24/2010 17:00        $0.00           $2,640.00       $1,120.00
1.3.4.3.1    LABOR HIRING/RECRUITING/PLACEMENT                            35     1/4/2011 17:00         $0.00           $9,333.33       $5,373.33
1.3.4.3.2    PRODUCTION SCHEDULE PLAN                                     35     1/4/2011 17:00         $0.00           $2,566.67       $233.33
1.3.4.7      MANUFACTURING VALIDATION REVIEW 1                            35     1/5/2011 17:00         $0.00             $0.00           $0.00
                                                              January
1.3.4.1.5    INSTALLATION OF WIRING/COMPUTER                              35     1/7/2011 17:00         $0.00           $2,640.00       $1,120.00
1.3.4.2.4    SYTEM CALIBRATION AND SETUP ROBOTICS                         37    1/21/2011 12:00         $0.00           $2,508.00       $1,560.00
1.3.4.1.6    INSTALLATION/SETUP EQUIPMENT ROBOTICS                        37    1/21/2011 17:00         $0.00           $2,640.00       $2,120.00
1.3.4.2.2    TRAINING ON ROBOTICS EQUIPMENT                               39     2/4/2011 12:00         $0.00           $2,508.00       $560.00
1.3.4.4.1.1 MVB1- TRANING SHIFT 1                                         39     2/4/2011 17:00      $340,000.00       $369,095.73     $24,179.47
1.3.4.4.1.2 MVB1-TRAINING SHIFT 2                                         39     2/4/2011 17:00         $0.00           $26,390.00     $21,890.00
1.3.4.4.1.3 ENGINEERING/QUALITY TESTING 1                                 39     2/4/2011 17:00         $0.00           $2,772.00       $1,008.00
                                                              February
1.3.4.8      MANUFACTURING VALIDATION REVIEW 2                            39     2/4/2011 17:00         $0.00             $0.00           $0.00
1.3.4.4.3.1 PRODUCTION SHIFT 1                                            40     2/7/2011 14:20         $0.00           $65,124.80     $55,105.60
1.3.4.4.3.2 PRODUCTION SHIFT 2                                            40     2/7/2011 14:20         $0.00           $31,903.73     $26,995.47
1.3.4.4.3.3 PRODUCTION SHIFT 3                                            40     2/7/2011 14:20         $0.00           $15,244.67     $12,899.33
1.3.4.4.2.1 MVB2- TRAINING SHIFT 1                                        43     3/2/2011 15:40      $102,500.00       $123,762.27      $5,495.33
1.3.4.4.2.2 MVB2-TRAINING SHIFT 2                                         43     3/2/2011 15:40         $0.00           $19,285.00      $4,975.00
1.3.4.4.3.4 PRODUCTION SHIFT 1                                            43     3/2/2011 15:40         $0.00           $47,591.20     $12,524.00
1.3.4.4.3.5 PRODUCTION SHIFT 2                                            43     3/2/2011 15:40         $0.00           $23,314.27      $6,135.33
                                                               March
1.3.4.4.3.6 PRODUCTION SHIFT 3                                            43     3/2/2011 15:40         $0.00           $11,140.33
1.3.4.4.2.3 ENGINEERING/QUALITY TESTING 2                                 43     3/2/2011 17:00         $0.00
                                                                                                                        102 | P a g $2,931.67
                                                                                                                        $2,772.00
                                                                                                                                    e
                                                                                                                                    $1,008.00
            Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
1.3.4.5.1    AUDITS OF FINANCIALS                                         43     3/2/2011 17:00         $0.00           $5,060.00       $1,540.00
1.3.4.9      SORP REVIEW                                                  43     3/2/2011 17:00         $0.00             $0.00           $0.00
Totals                                                                                              $1,780,000.00      $2,184,458.38   $215,127.00
8.4 Appendix D – Value Stream Maps
                                                    Current Process Mapping
                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Automotive Parts VSM,Inc.igx

                                                                                                                                                                                                           Sales                                                     Information
Supplier                                                                                                                     Information                                                                  Forecast
                                                                                                                                                                     Customer Demand:
                                  Prod.                                                                                                                                                                     Market                                                                                                                                                                               Customer
                                                                                                                                                                     3000 pieces per Day                    Demand
                                 Control                                                                                                                               (Takt Time 28.8
                                     Prepare                                                                                                                              seconds)
                                    Production
                                                        Information
                                     Schedule


             30 minutes
Materials                      Reception            5 minutes
                                                                                                                              5 minutes                            1 minutes                                                                                                                                              5 minutes
                                                                   Materials            60 minutes
                                                                                                                                                                                    Quality              20 minutes
                                                                                                                                                                                                                         Production
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               2 minutes
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Quality            5 minutes
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Paint                                 Quality          1 minutes

 Dept                            Dept                                                                   Production                           Production                                                                                                                                                                                                                     Production              Production
                                                                    Dept                                                                                                             Dept                                                                     Inspector                               Shop                                   Dept
    Mtl                          Wire Gauge                                                                                                                                                                               Pre-Assembled
                                                                                                         Wire Forming                              Hardening                          Visual                                                                    MagnaFlux                            Coating of                               Visual
 Reception                      8 Checking                         Ship Parts to                                                                                                                                            VA Parts                                                                                                                                             Packing                Shipping
                                                                                                        Cold/Hot Coiling                       3                                    Inspection                                                                  Inspection                             Parts                                Inspection
                           Value Add: 50 minutes                   Production by                                                                                                                                           9
                                                                                                          22                              Value Add: 30 minutes                Value Add: 6 minutes                                                        Value Add: 5 minutes                Value Add: 40 minutes                  Value Add: 5 minutes               Value Add: 10 minutes   Value Add: 10 minutes
                           NVA = 20 minutes                          Diameter                                                                                                                                         Value Add: 35 minutes
                           Defect = 25%                                                              Value Add: 50 minutes                NVA = 1 minutes                      NVA = 0 seconds                                                             NVA = 0 minutes                     NVA = 5 minutes                        NVA = 0 seconds                    NVA = 0 minutes         NVA = 0 minutes
                                                                                                                                                                                                                      NVA = 5 minutes
                                                                Value Add: 5 minutes                 NVA = 15 minutes                                                          Defect = 15%                                                                Defect = 30%                        C/O = 20 mins.                         Defect = 1%                        Defect = 0%             Defect = 0%
                                                                                                                                                                                                                      C/O = 20 mins.
                                                                NVA = 2 minutes                      C/O = 20 mins.
                               Checkers                                                                                                       Control
                                                                                                                                                                                   Quality                                                                                                          Paint
                                                                Defect = 5%

                                                                                                         Operator                             Operator                                                                     Welding                                                                 Operator
                              Select Samples                                                                                                                                      Inspector
                                                                                                           Divide in                               Tempering                                                               Operator
                                8                                                                                                                                                     Check                                                                                                           Setup
                                                                                                           Cold and                                 Materials                                                                 Setup
                           Value Add: 15 minutes                                                                                                                                      100%                                                                                                          Painting Jig
                           NVA = 5 minutes                                                                Hot Coiling                              3                                                                        Welding Jigs
                                                                                                                                                                                      Visually                                                                                                 Value Add: 15 minutes
                                                                                                            22                            Value Add: 10 minutes                                                                9
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               NVA = 5 minutes
                                Checkers                                                             Value Add: 20 minutes
                                                                                                     NVA = 5 minutes
                                                                                                                                          NVA = 0 minutes
                                                                                                                                          Defect = 2%
                                                                                                                                                                               Value Add: 3 minutes
                                                                                                                                                                               NVA = 0 minutes
                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Value Add: 20 minutes                                                    C/O = 20 mins.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                      NVA = 5 minutes
                                                                                                                                                                               Defect = 15%
                                                                                                                                                                                                                      C/O = 20 mins.
                                     Gauge                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Control
                                    Measuring                                                            Operator
                                8
                                                                                                                                               Control                             Quality                                 Welding                                                                 Operator
                                                                                                             Setup
                            Value Add: 15 minutes
                                                                                                                                              Operator                            Inspector                                Operator                                                                    Dipping
                            NVA = 5 minutes                                                                 Forming
                            Defect = 10%
                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Welding VA                                                                Spraying
                                                                                                            22 Jigs                                                                   Check
                                                                                                                                                    Grinding                                                                  Parts                                                                  Heating or
                               Checkers                                                              Value Add: 15 minutes
                                                                                                     NVA = 5 minutes
                                                                                                                                                   3                                  100%
                                                                                                                                                                                                                               9                                                                     Deposition
                                                                                                                                          Value Add: 10 minutes                     Production
                                Separete by                                                          C/O = 20 mins.                                                                                                   Value Add: 10 minutes                                                    Value Add: 10 minutes
                                                                                                                                          NVA = 1 minutes                           MangaFlux                         NVA = 0 minutes                                                          NVA = 0 minutes
                                 Diameter                                                                                                 Defect = 1%

                                3                                                                        Operator                                                              Value Add: 3 minutes
                                                                                                                                                                               NVA = 0 seconds
                           Value Add: 15 minutes
                                                                                                          Coil, Bend,                          Control                         Defect = 10%                                Welding                                                                  Control
                           NVA = 5 minutes
                                                                                                            Form                                                                                                           Operator                                                                Operator
                           Defect = 15%
                                                                                                           22                                 Operator
                                                                                                     Value Add: 10 minutes
                                                                                                     NVA = 5 minutes                                 Shot                                                                  Tearing Test                                                                Drying
                                                                                                     Defect = 25%                                   Peening
                               Inspectors                                                                                                          3
                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Value Add: 5 minutes
                                                                                                                                                                                                                      NVA = 0 minutes
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               Value Add: 15 minutes
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               NVA = 0 minutes
                                                                                                                                          Value Add: 10 minutes
                                                                                                                                          NVA = 0 minutes
                                  Check for                                                                                               Defect = 2%

                               Imperfections
                                3

                            Value Add: 5 minutes
                            NVA = 5 minutes
                            Defect = 15%



                30                                                                                                                                                                                                              2                                                              45
              minutes          70 minutes 5 minutes                7 minutes           60 minutes 65 minutes 5 minutes 31 minutes                                 1 minutes                           20 minutes 40 minutes  minutes                                              5 minutes  minutes                   5 minutes                             1 minutes                                                   Lead Time = 428 minutes
                               50 minutes                          5 minutes                            50 minutes                           30 minutes                           6 minutes                              35 minutes                           5 minutes                                40                                5 minutes                          10 minutes              10 minutes           VA / T = 246 minutes
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     minutes                                                                                                             NVA = 48 minutes
                                                                                                          20 mins.                                                                                                          20 mins.                                                                20 mins.                                                                                                             Inventory Time = 134 minutes
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         Defect = 58%
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         C/O = 60 mins.




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 103 | P a g e
                          Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
Future Process Mapping

                                                                                                                                                                                                               Automotive Parts VSM_Future,Inc.igx

                                                                                                                                                                                                           Sales
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   Information
Supplier                                                                                                                    Information                                                                   Forecast
                                                                      Prod.Control                                                                                                                                                 Customer Demand:
                                                                                                                                                                                                              Market
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   3000 pieces per Day                                                                                                                                        Customer
                                                                            Prepare                                                                                                                          Demand
                                                                           Production                                                                                                                                                (Takt Time 19.2
                                                                            Schedule                                                                                                                                                    seconds)

                                                                      Information


                                                   5 minutes                            2 minutes                              5 minutes
Materials     5 minutes
                             Reception                         Materials Dept                                                                                      1 minutes
                                                                                                                                                                                       Quality          10 minutes
                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Production                           Quality                                                 5 minutes
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       Quality
                                                                                                       Production                            Production                                                                                      2 minutes                          5 minutes
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               Paint Shop                                               1 minutes
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       Production                Production
 Dept                          Dept                                                                                                                                                     Dept                                                                Inspector                                                                   Dept
  Material                     Wire Gauge                          Ship Parts to                                                                                                         Visual                         Pre-Assembled                         MagnaFlux                                                                  Visual
                                                                                                        Wire Forming                                Hardening                                                                                                                                                                                                              Packing                   Shipping
                                                                                                                                                                                                                              VA Parts                                                         Coating of Parts
 Reception                     2   Checking                       Production by                        Cold/Hot Coiling                         3                                      Inspection                                                             Inspection                                                               Inspection
                                                                                                                                                                                                                          2
                          Value Add: 12 minutes                     Diameter                          5                                    Value Add: 30 minutes                 Value Add: 6 minutes                                                    Value Add: 5 minutes               Value Add: 40 minutes                Value Add: 5 minutes               Value Add: 10 minutes     Value Add: 10 minutes
                                                                                                                                                                                                                     Value Add: 12 minutes
                          NVA = 0 minutes                                                           Value Add: 12 minutes                  NVA = 1 minutes                       NVA = 0 seconds                                                         NVA = 0 minutes                    NVA = 5 minutes                      NVA = 0 seconds                    NVA = 0 minutes           NVA = 0 minutes
                                                               Value Add: 5 minutes                                                                                                                                  NVA = 0 minutes
                          Defect = 95%                                                                                                                                           Defect = 15%                                                            Defect = 30%                       C/O = 20 mins.                       Defect = 1%                        Defect = 0%               Defect = 0%
                                                               NVA = 2 minutes                      NVA = 1 minutes                                                                                                  C/O = 3 mins.
                          C/O = 2 mins.                        Defect = 5%                          C/O = 3 mins.
                                                                                                                                               Control                                                                   Welding                                                                  Paint
                                                                                                                                                                                      Quality
                                Wire                                                                                                           Operator                                                                  Operator
                                                                                                     Wire Forming                                                                    Inspector                                                                                                   Operator
                              Operators                                                                                                         Tempering                                                                       Setup
                                                                                                      Operator                                                                          Check                                                                                                   Setup Painting
                             Select Samples                                                                                                     3 Materials                                                                    Robotic
                                                                                                                                                                                        100%                                                                                                         Jig
                              and Insert in                                                                                                Value Add: 10 minutes                                                               Welder
                                                                                                                                                                                        Visually
                              Wire Gauge in                                                          Insert Coil Form in                   NVA = 0 minutes                                                                    2                                                             Value Add: 15 minutes
                                                                                                                                           Defect = 2%                                                                                                                                      NVA = 5 minutes
                               Automated                                                                Wire Former                                                              Value Add: 3 minutes                Value Add: 5 minutes
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            C/O = 20 mins.
                                                                                                                                                                                 NVA = 0 minutes                     NVA = 0 minutes
                                                                                                      5
                               Wire Gauge                                                                                                                                        Defect = 15%                        C/O = 3 mins.
                                Checkers
                                                                                                    Value Add: 1 minutes
                                                                                                    NVA = 0 minutes
                                                                                                                                                Control                                                                                                                                           Control
                               2                                                                                                               Operator                                                                  Welding                                                                 Operator
                          Value Add: 8 minutes                                                                                                                                      Quality
                          NVA = 0 minutes                                                                                                                                                                                Operator                                                                   Dipping
                          C/O = 2 mins.                                                              Wire Forming                               3
                                                                                                                                                     Grinding                     Inspector                                    Control                                                             Spraying
                                                                                                      Operator                             Value Add: 10 minutes                      Check                                    Welding                                                            Heating or
                                                                                                                                           NVA = 1 minutes                            100%                                        Process                                                         Deposition
                                Wire                                                                                                       Defect = 1%
                                                                                                          Calibrate CNC                                                             Production                                2
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Value Add: 10 minutes
                              Operators                                                                     Geometry                                                                MangaFlux                        Value Add: 7 minutes                                                   NVA = 0 minutes
                                                                                                      5                                         Control                                                              NVA = 0 minutes
                               Control Wire                                                                                                                                    Value Add: 3 minutes
                               Selection and
                                                                                                    Value Add: 5 minutes
                                                                                                                                               Operator                        NVA = 0 seconds                                                                                                    Control
                                                                                                                                                                                                                         Welding
                                                                                                    NVA = 1 minutes
                                                                                                    C/O = 3 mins.                                                              Defect = 10%
                               2 Sorting
                                                                                                                                               Shot Peening                                                              Operator                                                                Operator
                          Value Add: 2 minutes
                                                                                                     Wire Forming
                                                                                                                                                3
                          NVA = 0 minutes
                                                                                                                                           Value Add: 10 minutes                                                                                                                                    Drying
                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Tearing Test
                                                                                                      Operator                             NVA = 0 minutes
                                                                                                                                           Defect = 2%                                                                                                                                      Value Add: 15 minutes
                                                                                                                                                                                                                     Value Add: 5 minutes                                                   NVA = 0 minutes
                                                                                                       Produce Spring                                                                                                NVA = 0 minutes
                                                                                                        Wire Form in
                                                                                                       Automated Wire
                                                                                                           Former
                                                                                                      5

                                                                                                    Value Add: 2 minutes
                                                                                                    NVA = 0 minutes
                                                                                                    Defect = 98%



                                                                                           2
                 5                                                                                                                                                                              2
              minutes                             5 minutes          7 minutes          minutes        13 minutes            5 minutes 31 minutes 1 minutes           10 minutes             minutes           5 minutes                                                                       45 minutes           5 minutes                           1 minutes                                                     Lead Time = 197 minutes
                             12 minutes                              5 minutes                         12 minutes                      30 minutes           6 minutes            12 minutes          5 minutes                                                                                 40 minutes                           5 minutes                          10 minutes                10 minutes           VA / T = 147 minutes
                                   2 mins.                                                                 3 mins.                                                                                                            3 mins.                                                            20 mins.                                                                                                             NVA = 9 minutes
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Inventory Time = 41 minutes
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Defect = 97.2%
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      C/O = 28 mins.




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            104 | P a g e
                           Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
8.5 Appendix E – Change Request Form
                             Automotive Parts, Inc Change Request Form
Change Request:                                                          Page     of

Title
Project Title                    Task No.             Revision No. 1     Date issued:

Description of change:


Reason for Change:


Documentation attached
Originated by                                                            Date:
                                                                         Date:
Cost Implications :
Schedule Implications :
Implications of Performance of Deliverable(s) :
Other Implications ( risks & issues ):
Proposed plan for implementation

Implications Evaluated by:                                               Date:
Recommendation

Recommended by:                                                                  Date:
Documentation attached
Approved by                                   Date:   Approved by:               Date:




                                                                                  105 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
8.6 Appendix F – Baseline Schedule




                                              106 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
8.7 Appendix G – Earned Value Analysis Week 14




                                                 107 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
8.8 Appendix H – Contract Close Out Checklist
                                API - CONTRACT CLOSE-OUT WORKSEET


1. PROJECT NAME                                      4. OTHER TRANSACTION (OT) NUMBER



2. NAME OF RECIPIENT                                 5. OT MODIFICATION NUMBER



3. RECIPIENT CLASS/TYPE                              6. DATE OF PYSICAL COMPLETION




                       ACTION ITEM                                       COMPLETED

7. FINAL REPORT ACCEPTED                             Yes           No                Date


8. FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT                              Yes           No                Date


    Total Amount Obligated: $
    Total Govt. Expenditures $
      (Date of Final Payment                     )
    Unliquidated Obligation $


    Final Cost-Share Percentage:
    Recipient $                Govt. $
                                     %                %
    Negotiated                       %                %


                                         Final
          Neg.
   Recipient:       In-Kind
                    Cash



                                                                                            108 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
Yes   No   Date
    Final expenditure audit determined necessary?
                                                      Yes   No   Date
   Issues identified in final expenditure audit
resolved
    If applicable?
                                                      Yes   No   Date


    Modification to deobligate excess funds
    and/or reflect adjustments


Notes:




9. FINAL PATENT DISCLOSURE

   (Invention Disclosure - Agreement Article      )   Yes   No   Date


   All invention Proposal Disclosures Submitted to
    appropriate buying office


   Consortium as completed Invention Proposal
   Disclosure list.


   Notes:




                                                                        109 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
ACTION ITEM                           COMPLETED

10. LICENSES ACQUIRED

                                                  Yes   No          Date
    Notes:




11. DISPOSITION OF PROPERTY

                                                  Yes   No          Date
   Obtain list of applicable equipment received
from
    consortium and disposition of equipment
    completed.


    Notes:




                                                                           110 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
OTHER TRANSACTION
                                              CLOSEOUT CECKLIST


AGREEMENT NUMBER:                                        THROUGHMODIFICATION NO:

RECIPIENT:

PERFORMANCE PERIOD:                                                                   DATE

                                                                                   COMPLETED


1. Final Invention Disclosure Report Completed/Cleared                                ______

2. Final Patent/Royalty Report Completed/Cleared                                      ______

3. Final Technical Report Received/Accepted                                           ______

4. Final Business Report Received/Accepted                                            ______

5. All Milestones Satisfactorily Completed                                            ______

6. Verification of DTIC Reporting Completed                                           ______

7. Disposition of Classified Material                                                 ______

8. GFE/Property Disposition Actions Completed                                         ______

9. Plant Clearance Completed                                                          ______

10. Final Voucher/SF 269/270/272 Submitted                                            ______

11. Method for Verifying Costs Determined                                             ______

12. Cost Verification Process Completed                                               ______

13. Settlement of Cost Share/Contribution Issues                                      ______

14. Final Payment Completed                                                           ______

15. Final Removal of Excess Funds                                                     ______

16. Other Requirements Completed (Specify)                                            ______

         a.                                                                           ______

         b.                                                                           ______

17. Issuance of Completion Statement (DD 1594)                                        ______


                                                                                        111 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
8.9 Appendix I




                                              112 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
113 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
114 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
9 Tables
      Table 1.1 Project Phases ................................................................................................................................ 6
      Table 1.2: Product Development Program ..................................................................................................... 8
      Table 2.1: Goals & Objectives (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) .............................................................................. 10
      Table 2.2: Project Description ..................................................................................................................... 12
      Table 2.3: Phases and Milestones (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ........................................................................ 12
      Table 2.4: Schedule of Rates (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)................................................................................ 13
      Table 2.5: Equipment Rates (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ................................................................................. 13
      Table 2.6: Other Costs (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ......................................................................................... 14
      Table 2.7 : Summary Cost Structure (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) .................................................................... 14
      Table 2.8: Payment Schedule (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) .............................................................................. 15
      Table 2.9: Assumptions (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ....................................................................................... 16
      Table 2.10: Risk Matrix (Modified) (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ...................................................................... 22
      Table 2.11: Weather/Shipping Action Plan (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) .......................................................... 24
      Table 2.12: Overtime Proposal (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ............................................................................ 24
      Table 2.13: Labor Conflicts Action Plan (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ............................................................... 25
      Table 2.14: Replacement Proposal (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ..................................................................... 25
      Table 2.15: Stage Gate Reviews (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ........................................................................... 28
      Table 3.1: Corporate Responsibility Matrix (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ......................................................... 31
      Table 3.2: Corporate Roles & Responsibilities (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ..................................................... 32
      Table 3.3: Project Team Roles & Responsibilities (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ................................................ 36
      Table 4.1: Procurement Process Procedures................................................................................................ 40
      Table 4.2: Salary Labor Cost (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ................................................................................ 45
      Table 4.3: Hourly Labor (Automated Line) Cost (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ................................................... 46
      Table 4.4: Hourly (Current Line) Labor Cost (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ......................................................... 46
      Table 4.5: Equipment Cost (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)................................................................................... 47
      Table 4.6: Contingency Cost and Others (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) .............................................................. 47
      Table 4.7: Change Management Process (Services, 2010) ............................................................................ 48
      Table 5.1: Project Cost Status (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) .............................................................................. 61
      Table 5.2: Monthly Payments (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) .............................................................................. 63
      Table 5.3: Monthly Payments Allocations- Modified (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ........................................... 64
      Table 5.4: Customer Resources (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ........................................................................... 68
      Table 6.1: Budget at Completion Breakdown (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ...................................................... 78
      Table 7.1: Project Expansion Summary........................................................................................................ 83
      Table 7.2: Phases and Deliverables (NPD-Solutions) .................................................................................... 86
      Table 7.3: Marketing Research Analysis Worksheet .................................................................................... 87
      Table 7.4: Program Scope Summary ............................................................................................................ 89




                                                                                                                                            115 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
10 Figures
         Figure 1.1: Process Performance Metrics (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ......................................................... 7
         Figure 2.1: Stakeholders (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ................................................................................. 10
         Figure 2.2: Benefits (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ........................................................................................ 11
         Figure 2.3:Cost Distribution Chart (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) .................................................................. 14
         Figure 2.4: SIPOC Current Process (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) .................................................................. 19
         Figure 2.5: Process Performance Metrics (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ....................................................... 20
         Figure 2.6: Baseline Modified Schedule (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) .......................................................... 21
         Figure 2.7: Risk Summary Chart - Modified (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) .................................................... 23
         Figure 2.8: Project Completion/Deliverables (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) .................................................. 27
         Figure 2.9: Acceptance Test Chart (Motors, 2006) .................................................................................. 28
         Figure 2.10: Acceptance Criteria/Sign-0ff Chart (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) .............................................. 29
         Figure 3.1: Corporate Organizational Chart (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) .................................................... 30
         Figure 3.2: WBS (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) .............................................................................................. 34
         Figure 3.3: Project Organizational Structure (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ................................................... 35
         Figure 3.4: Project Team Responsibility Matrix- Modified (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) .............................. 38
         Figure 4.1: Procurement Process (Garrett, 2007) .................................................................................... 41
         Figure 4.2: Monitoring Process (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ....................................................................... 44
         Figure 4.3: Change Management Process (Nicholas & Steyn, 2008)........................................................ 51
         Figure 4.4: Quality Control System (Machinery) ..................................................................................... 53
         Figure 4.8: Control Chart Process (Evans, 2008) ...................................................................................... 59
         Figure 4.9: Control Points InterpretationInvalid source specified. .......................................................... 60
         Figure 5.1: WBS/ Cost Package Breakdown (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) .................................................... 62
         Figure 5.2: Progress Payments Chart- Modified (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) .............................................. 63
         Figure 5.3: Monthly Payments Allocation Chart (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ............................................. 64
         Figure 5.4: EVA Control Plan- Baseline (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ........................................................... 65
         Figure 5.5: EVA Control Plan - Modified (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ......................................................... 65
         Figure 5.6: Earned Value Analysis (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ................................................................... 66
         Figure 5.7: Estimate at Completion (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ................................................................ 67
         Figure 6.1: Decision Tree - Supplier Change Cost Analysis (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) .............................. 81
         Figure 7.1: Program Expansion Team (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ............................................................. 84
         Figure 7.2: Product Development Process (NPD-Solutions) .................................................................... 86




                                                                                                                               116 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
11 Works Cited
    1. Danfoss, S. (2010). Sauer Danfoss Global Standard-GS-002-FMEA. Retrieved from
       http://www.sauer-danfoss.com/: http://www.sauer-danfoss.com/

    2. Evans, J. (2008). Managing for Quality and Performance Excellence.

    3. Garrett, G. A. (2007). World Class Contracting, 4th Edition.

    4. Machinery, L. (2010). Quality. Retrieved from http://bit.ly/d9Ix1R

    5. Macinnes, R. L., & Macinnes, R. L. (2002). The Lean Memory Jogger.

    6. McCoy, D. (2009). Sauer-Danfoss Global Standard GS-002 Failure Mode and Effect Analysis in
       Design .

    7. Motors, G. (2006). General Motors Status Criteria for PQRR.

    8. Nicholas, M. J., & Steyn, H. (2008). Project Management for Business, Engineering and
       Technology, 3rd Edition.

    9. NPD-Solutions. (n.d.). NPD-Solutions. Retrieved from
         http://www.npd-solutions.com/proccap.html

    10. PMI. (2010). PMP and CAPM Quick Reference.

    11. Ross, L., & Rodriguez, H. (2010). API, Inc.

    12. Services, C. P. (2010). Project Scope and Change Management. Retrieved from
         http://www.collegiateproject.com/articles/Preliminary%20Change%20Management%20Plan.pdf




                                                                                          117 | P a g e
Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600

More Related Content

PDF
Building Code of Pakistan
DOC
Quantity Surveyor & Billing Engineer-KP
PDF
PPTX
Topic 1 - Bidding Documents.pptx
PDF
USACE Construction Quality Management manual
PDF
07 - Method Statement for Plastering Works.pdf
PPTX
Construction - Accounting and Tax Aspects
PDF
Full Report
Building Code of Pakistan
Quantity Surveyor & Billing Engineer-KP
Topic 1 - Bidding Documents.pptx
USACE Construction Quality Management manual
07 - Method Statement for Plastering Works.pdf
Construction - Accounting and Tax Aspects
Full Report

What's hot (10)

PDF
Construction delays
DOC
Column & beam
PPTX
Philippine Licensing Board for Contractors Act by Cabilogan, Eryl Kean R. (RA...
PPTX
Counterfort Retaining Wall
PDF
Material approval procedure
PDF
Tendering documentation
PDF
6 portal frames
PPT
An Overview of the FIDIC FORMS OF CONTRACT and Contracts Committee Activi...
PPTX
G&Z Slipform Paver Fundamentals
DOC
Method stm lean concrete
Construction delays
Column & beam
Philippine Licensing Board for Contractors Act by Cabilogan, Eryl Kean R. (RA...
Counterfort Retaining Wall
Material approval procedure
Tendering documentation
6 portal frames
An Overview of the FIDIC FORMS OF CONTRACT and Contracts Committee Activi...
G&Z Slipform Paver Fundamentals
Method stm lean concrete
Ad

Similar to API Project Capstone Paper (20)

PDF
It project development fundamentals
PDF
Strategic Technology Roadmap Houston Community College 2005
PDF
Project Implementation Plan
PDF
Coinaid earth pilot
PDF
Business Plan
PDF
WebIT2 Consultants Proposal
DOCX
Strategy Field Project Report
PDF
SSTRM - StrategicReviewGroup.ca - Workshop 2: Power/Energy and Sustainability...
DOC
Sap hr implementation config rc - Aditi Tarafdar
PDF
BizTalk Practical Course Preview
PDF
Hcc procurement procedures 8 28-18
PDF
Qs2 consultants manual
PDF
Solmanfocusedbuild
PDF
BIMplement inc_proposal
PDF
It Handbook On Mergers Acqui 130975
PDF
Invest plus user manual
PDF
U M Lvs I D E F
PDF
E elt constrproposal
DOCX
Business proposal coffee shop in Canada
PDF
Scope management
It project development fundamentals
Strategic Technology Roadmap Houston Community College 2005
Project Implementation Plan
Coinaid earth pilot
Business Plan
WebIT2 Consultants Proposal
Strategy Field Project Report
SSTRM - StrategicReviewGroup.ca - Workshop 2: Power/Energy and Sustainability...
Sap hr implementation config rc - Aditi Tarafdar
BizTalk Practical Course Preview
Hcc procurement procedures 8 28-18
Qs2 consultants manual
Solmanfocusedbuild
BIMplement inc_proposal
It Handbook On Mergers Acqui 130975
Invest plus user manual
U M Lvs I D E F
E elt constrproposal
Business proposal coffee shop in Canada
Scope management
Ad

More from Ryder System, Inc. (13)

PDF
Resume functional automotive
PPTX
Hybrid Systems Definitions/Concepts
PDF
Battery Experience
PDF
PPTX
GMV Values
PDF
Lean Startups from LEI
PDF
Oci white paper general motors
PDF
Profile Xt
PDF
Kaizen Workshop - Sales & Marketing
PDF
Lean Project Management Principles
PDF
Lsi Results And Circumplex Hector Rodriguez
PDF
Value Stream Mapping
PPT
Gm Job Description
Resume functional automotive
Hybrid Systems Definitions/Concepts
Battery Experience
GMV Values
Lean Startups from LEI
Oci white paper general motors
Profile Xt
Kaizen Workshop - Sales & Marketing
Lean Project Management Principles
Lsi Results And Circumplex Hector Rodriguez
Value Stream Mapping
Gm Job Description

Recently uploaded (20)

PPTX
Lecture (1)-Introduction.pptx business communication
PPT
340036916-American-Literature-Literary-Period-Overview.ppt
PPT
Data mining for business intelligence ch04 sharda
PDF
Elevate Cleaning Efficiency Using Tallfly Hair Remover Roller Factory Expertise
PDF
SIMNET Inc – 2023’s Most Trusted IT Services & Solution Provider
PDF
Business model innovation report 2022.pdf
PPTX
5 Stages of group development guide.pptx
PDF
Laughter Yoga Basic Learning Workshop Manual
PDF
Outsourced Audit & Assurance in USA Why Globus Finanza is Your Trusted Choice
PPTX
Dragon_Fruit_Cultivation_in Nepal ppt.pptx
PPTX
Amazon (Business Studies) management studies
PDF
Unit 1 Cost Accounting - Cost sheet
PPT
Chapter four Project-Preparation material
PDF
pdfcoffee.com-opt-b1plus-sb-answers.pdfvi
PDF
MSPs in 10 Words - Created by US MSP Network
PPTX
ICG2025_ICG 6th steering committee 30-8-24.pptx
PPTX
Belch_12e_PPT_Ch18_Accessible_university.pptx
PDF
Katrina Stoneking: Shaking Up the Alcohol Beverage Industry
PPTX
CkgxkgxydkydyldylydlydyldlyddolydyoyyU2.pptx
DOCX
Euro SEO Services 1st 3 General Updates.docx
Lecture (1)-Introduction.pptx business communication
340036916-American-Literature-Literary-Period-Overview.ppt
Data mining for business intelligence ch04 sharda
Elevate Cleaning Efficiency Using Tallfly Hair Remover Roller Factory Expertise
SIMNET Inc – 2023’s Most Trusted IT Services & Solution Provider
Business model innovation report 2022.pdf
5 Stages of group development guide.pptx
Laughter Yoga Basic Learning Workshop Manual
Outsourced Audit & Assurance in USA Why Globus Finanza is Your Trusted Choice
Dragon_Fruit_Cultivation_in Nepal ppt.pptx
Amazon (Business Studies) management studies
Unit 1 Cost Accounting - Cost sheet
Chapter four Project-Preparation material
pdfcoffee.com-opt-b1plus-sb-answers.pdfvi
MSPs in 10 Words - Created by US MSP Network
ICG2025_ICG 6th steering committee 30-8-24.pptx
Belch_12e_PPT_Ch18_Accessible_university.pptx
Katrina Stoneking: Shaking Up the Alcohol Beverage Industry
CkgxkgxydkydyldylydlydyldlyddolydyoyyU2.pptx
Euro SEO Services 1st 3 General Updates.docx

API Project Capstone Paper

  • 1. 2010 Automation Spring/Wire Form Assembly Line Working Plan Project Managers: Lydia Ross Hector Rodriguez Automotive Parts, Inc Master Capstone Project Keller School of Management 6/16/2010
  • 2. Contents 1 Executive Summary ...............................................................................................................................................6 1.1 Project Baseline ............................................................................................................................................6 1.2 Project Variance ...........................................................................................................................................8 1.3 Project Expansion .........................................................................................................................................8 2 Technical Proposal ................................................................................................................................................9 2.1 Project Purpose ............................................................................................................................................9 2.1.1 Background ..............................................................................................................................................9 2.1.2 The Need ..................................................................................................................................................9 2.1.3 Objectives and Goals .............................................................................................................................10 2.2 Project Benefits ..........................................................................................................................................10 2.2.1 Stakeholders ..........................................................................................................................................10 2.2.2 Benefits ..................................................................................................................................................11 2.3 Statement of work .....................................................................................................................................12 2.3.1 Project Summary ...................................................................................................................................12 2.3.2 Scope .....................................................................................................................................................12 2.3.3 Phases and Milestones ..........................................................................................................................12 2.3.4 Schedule of Rates - Labor ......................................................................................................................13 2.3.5 Equipment and Materials ......................................................................................................................13 2.3.6 General Administration, Contingency, Others .......................................................................................14 2.3.7 Summary of Total Cost ...........................................................................................................................14 2.3.8 Payment terms.......................................................................................................................................15 2.3.9 Statement of work – Assumptions.........................................................................................................16 2.3.10 Change Management Process ...........................................................................................................17 2.3.11 Engagement Related Expenses..........................................................................................................17 2.3.12 Acceptance and authorization...........................................................................................................18 2.4 Project Plan ................................................................................................................................................19 2.4.1 Technical Description of New System ....................................................................................................19 2.4.2 Facility Design and Simulation ...............................................................................................................20 2.4.3 Future Process .......................................................................................................................................20 2.4.4 Detailed Project Schedule - Modified ....................................................................................................21 2.4.5 Specific Challenges .................................................................................................................................22 2.4.6 Risk Management Matrix .......................................................................................................................22 2.4.7 Top Risk Recommended Action Plans ....................................................................................................24 2.5 Project Completion Plan.............................................................................................................................27 2.5.1 Deliverables ...........................................................................................................................................27 2|Page Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 3. 2.5.2 Acceptance Test ....................................................................................................................................28 2.5.3 Acceptance Sign-off Cart........................................................................................................................29 3 Management Proposal ........................................................................................................................................30 3.1 Corporate Organizational Structure ...........................................................................................................30 3.1.1 Corporate Roles and Responsibilities ....................................................................................................31 3.2 Project Organizational plan ........................................................................................................................34 3.2.1 Work Breakdown Structure ...................................................................................................................34 3.2.2 Project Organizational Structure ...........................................................................................................35 3.2.3 Project Team ..........................................................................................................................................36 3.2.4 Responsibility Matrix ............................................................................................................................38 4 Management Systems ........................................................................................................................................40 4.1 Supplier, Selection and Management ........................................................................................................40 4.1.1 Overview - Procurement of Automated Machines and Robots .............................................................40 4.1.2 Production-Line Equipment Vendors .....................................................................................................41 4.1.3 Computer Vendors.................................................................................................................................43 4.1.4 Contract Close-Out ................................................................................................................................43 4.2 Monitoring Cost and Schedule ...................................................................................................................44 4.2.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................44 4.2.2 Labor Cost and Schedule........................................................................................................................45 4.2.3 Major Equipment Cost and Schedule ....................................................................................................47 4.2.4 Contingency, Administration and Others Cost ......................................................................................47 4.3 Management of Scope and Change Orders ...............................................................................................48 4.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................48 4.3.2 Development of Scope ...........................................................................................................................49 4.3.3 Out-of-Scope Items ................................................................................................................................50 4.3.4 Documentation of Change of Scope ......................................................................................................51 4.4 Quality Management .................................................................................................................................52 4.4.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................52 4.4.2 Work Package Identification ..................................................................................................................54 4.4.3 Work Package Inputs, Process and Outputs ..........................................................................................55 4.4.4 Determining Possible Defects ................................................................................................................56 4.4.5 Prevention of Defects ............................................................................................................................56 4.4.6 Indentification of Defects ......................................................................................................................58 5 Project Cost Estimate ..........................................................................................................................................61 5.1 Project Cost ................................................................................................................................................61 5.1.1 Total Project Cost ...................................................................................................................................61 3|Page Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 4. 5.1.2 Breakdown of Project Costs ...................................................................................................................62 5.1.3 Progress Payments.................................................................................................................................63 5.1.4 Monthly Payment Distribution ..............................................................................................................64 5.1.5 Earned Value Control ............................................................................................................................65 5.1.6 Control Performance Index (CPI) & Schedule Performance Index (SPI) ................................................66 5.1.7 Estimate at Completion (EAC) and Variance at Completion (VAC) ........................................................67 5.2 Customer-Provide Resources .....................................................................................................................68 5.3 Terms and Conditions ................................................................................................................................69 6 Unexpected Event ...............................................................................................................................................73 6.1 Problem ......................................................................................................................................................73 6.1.1 General Description ...............................................................................................................................73 6.1.2 Current Status ........................................................................................................................................74 6.2 Alternative Solutions ..................................................................................................................................79 6.2.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................79 6.2.2 Continuing Contract ...............................................................................................................................79 6.2.3 Contract Modification ............................................................................................................................79 6.2.4 Pursuing another OEM...........................................................................................................................80 6.3 Proposed Action .........................................................................................................................................80 7 Scope Expansion .................................................................................................................................................83 7.1 Project Description .....................................................................................................................................83 7.2 Initial Planning............................................................................................................................................85 7.3 Scope ..........................................................................................................................................................87 7.4 Schedule .....................................................................................................................................................89 7.5 Budget ........................................................................................................................................................91 7.5.1 Schedule of Rates - Labor ......................................................................................................................91 7.5.2 Equipment and Materials ......................................................................................................................92 7.5.3 General Administration, Contingency, Others .......................................................................................92 7.5.4 Summary of Total Cost ...........................................................................................................................93 7.5.5 WBS/ Cost Breakdown ...........................................................................................................................95 8 Appendixes .........................................................................................................................................................98 8.1 Appendix A – Risk Assessment Matrix .......................................................................................................98 8.2 Appendix B – Schedule of Rates ...............................................................................................................100 8.3 Appendix C – Weekly Payments Progress ................................................................................................102 8.4 Appendix D – Value Stream Maps ............................................................................................................103 8.5 Appendix E – Change Request Form ........................................................................................................105 8.6 Appendix F – Baseline Schedule ...............................................................................................................106 4|Page Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 5. 8.7 Appendix G – Earned Value Analysis Week 14 .........................................................................................107 8.8 Appendix H – Contract Close Out Checklist .............................................................................................108 8.9 Appendix I ................................................................................................................................................112 9 Tables ................................................................................................................................................................115 10 Figures ..............................................................................................................................................................116 11 Works Cited .......................................................................................................................................................117 5|Page Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 6. 1 Executive Summary 1.1 Project Baseline Automated Parts Inc, (API) a coil spring, wire forming, subassembly automotive parts company is facing a lost in market share due to its inability to increase its production rate of manufactured parts while keeping competitive prices to customers. The company is currently stable with its current production but would like to increase market share with the coil spring and wire forms and increase production of value added parts. The value added parts will provide for a bigger profit margin. In order to meet these needs, API, Inc. as engaged its project management department to automate the coil spring, wire forming and welding equipment production lines. The automation of the production of parts and subassembly lines require the acquisition of new equipment, redesign of the production area, training of existing personnel, and in some cases the job placement of existing personnel in other organizations. The project management department has developed the team, planned the project, prepared the risk assessment and engaged engineering, procurement, finance and manufacturing to implement the plan. API as provided $2.5 million dollars for the entire plan which includes risk management and contingency plans and all cost associated with the project. The project is scheduled for a 43 week duration, starting on May 5th 2010. The Project is divided in four different phases: Table 1.1 Project Phases Phase Completion date rd 1. Project Planning Phase June 3 , 2010 . 2.Manufacturing Design Phase- Execution t September 7 , 2010 st 3.Procurement Phase-Execution December 21 , 2010 nd 4.Production/Validation Phase –Completion Marc 2 , 2011 The project is defined in terms of quality that will increase production as well as make the production process more efficient in time, cost and the percentage of accurate first time production of parts. A team of 18 new skilled operators will be trained to operate the new equipment, while current labor consisting of 42 workers needs to be reassigned for future labor needs and placement. Figure No.1 describes the time, cost and accuracy rates the organization estimates it can achieve with the implementation of this project. 6|Page Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 7. Figure 1.1: Process Performance Metrics (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) Current Process Future Process Variable Measure Variable Measure Lead Production Time 428 Minutes Lead Production Time <200 Minutes 1 Value Added Time 246 Minutes Value Added Time >150 Minutes Non-Value Added Time 48 Minutes Non-Value Added Time 0-10 Minutes Inventory Time ( waiting Time) <50 Minutes Inventory Time ( waiting Time) 134 Minutes Takt Time (seconds/part) <20 seconds/part Takt Time (seconds/part) 28.8 seconds/part First Time Quality : 58% First Time Quality : 90% Change-Over time: 60 Minutes Change-Over time: <30 Minutes  Lead time: the time needed to complete an activity from start to finis  Value Added Time: Activities that contributes to the production of final Product, transforms material and information  Non-Value Added time: waste time, activities that does not add value to the final product. Activities creating no value but which cannot be eliminated based on current state of technology or thinking  Inventory Time: waiting time to be process material, batch delays, and process delays.  Takt Time : total time available for work time per day divided by customer-demand per day – sets the pace of production to match rate of demand Source: The Lean Memory Jogger, Richard L. Macinnes. The new process will require automated equipment for the Wire Gauge Checking, Wire Forming and Robotic Welding for an investment of $1,700,000. Turnkey installation service and specialized training will be provided to our team of engineers and production operators by the selected Vendor. The Automation of Spring and Wire Form assembly line will bring numerous benefits to API including improvement in precision manufacturing of parts, flexible manufacturing, better quality control systems, empowered employees, improvement in ergonomics and safety in the operations, increase of production capacity, and reduction of Takt time and reduction of production cost by a range of 20%. Finally the automation of the coil spring/wire form production line will set the grounds for Lean Manufacturing and Just in Time Inventory as future corporate projects. It also will set the ground for new product development and more specialty sub-assembly products. 1 Value added operations are for example those operations which require some welding or subassembly 7|Page Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 8. The success of the project is paramount to API, therefore risk management and contingency plans are in place to overcome every possible foreseeable problem. 1.2 Project Variance One problem that occurred during the working plan of the project was the vendor of the coil springs and wire forms equipment became financially unstable and was threatening bankruptcy. Since project management anticipated a possible financial concern during vendor selection, the next highest scored vendor’s proposal specifications and the first phase of contract negotiations had been conducted in case the first vendor was unable to fulfill the negotiated contract. Project management defined the risk scenarios and contingency plan to overcome the risk. The risk contingency plans that were developed due to the vendor’s financial dilemmas included the following: 1. Stay with the vendor and receive the equipment without service or maintenance. 2. Wait for Vendor to be taken over by another company and renegotiate the contract. 3. Go with another OEM and continue with the project. Section 6 of this plan will describe all of the impacts of choosing one of the above scenarios. In order to maintain the integrity of the project in terms of time and cost the decision to pick another OEM was employed. In this scenario, the President of API, Owen French could stay with his initial goal of gaining more of the market share. 1.3 Project Expansion To achieve increased market share as quickly as possible, an expansion of the automation project was presented to project management which included new product development, as well as, acquiring consignment parts of subassemblies. Marketing research determined coil springs for military tanks, wire forms for NASA aerospace and subassemblies for the department of defense were new products developments the company would pursue. These new product developments will be launched in three separate timeframes during the project to ensure maximum efficiency and quality. Section 7.0 of this plan describes the expansion to the automation project. Table 1.2: Product Development Program Project Completion date th 1. Wire Forms Aerospace June 8 , 2011 . 2.Coil for Tanks Defense st August 1 , 2011 th 3.Subassemblies Defense January 16 , 2012 8|Page Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 9. 2 Technical Proposal 2.1 Project Purpose 2.1.1 Background Automotive Parts Inc. (API) is a small manufacturer of coil springs and wire forms. API’s customers include suppliers of mechanical and electrical subassemblies to automobile, truck, over-the-road vehicle OEMs (Original Equipment Manufacturer) and the OEMs themselves. These types of customers include such clients as Dana, Arvin Meritor, Ford, GM and Toyota. API is providing coil springs, wire forms and subassemblies that include welded parts for these important clients. In order to provide better service to its clients, API also offers unique prototypes and fast turnaround of its coil springs and wire forms. The manufacturing process to produce the photo types, coil spring and wire forms require several steps. The manufacturing processes involved in producing springs and flexible wire forms are wire gauge checking, wire forming, and welding. Wire gage checking is a complex process which also includes inspections for imperfections in the wire. Other operations in the manufacturing process include the value added operations. Value added operations are those operations which require some welding or subassembly. For example, the ends of a formed-wire piece may be welded to a small metal base plate for screw-mounting within a vehicle, or for applying a spring’s force over a larger area to hold another part in place. Value-added operations represent bigger margin work than wire form and coil springs. Therefore the Company’s goal is to increase business in the value added operations area. 2.1.2 The Need The Company needs to get its cost in-line to stay competitive. Currently API is losing market share because of its inability to meet the prices of its major competitors. The aim is to automate the current manufacturing process of Wire Gauge checking, Wire formers and Welding. By automating these processes, API can produce parts much quicker as well as increase its capacity. The Company is prepared to spend $2.5 million for the automation project of its production lines. To achieve its goals, the company will buy automated equipment for Electronic Wire Gauge Checkers, Automated Wire Formers and Robotic Welders. In addition to the automated resources, there will be labor resources including 2 operators for the wire gauge checking operations, 10 operators for the wire forming operation and 4 operators for the robotic welding operation. 9|Page Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 10. 2.1.3 Objectives and Goals The objectives of the Automation of the Coil/Springs production Line is to deliver better quality parts, with an updated production process that will make Automotive Parts, Inc more competitive in the market and increase its market share, while reducing production cost. Table 2.1: Goals & Objectives (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) Goals Objectives Method Measures of Success Invest in new Have top notch Production Update Process Electronic Wire Gauge The Process in full operation with Facility for Springs and Wire with Automated Checkers, Automated 100% Installation and Start-up for Forms Equipment Wire Formers and Production ready in 10 months Robotic Welders Study Current Process Become a Cost oriented Reduce Check for Inefficiencies operation that contributes Reduce Production Cost by 20% Production Cost and Cost Reduction to the profit margin Opportunities Decrease Takt Time Increase Peak Capacity Produce the best Quality Increase Quality (time to process a part) from 28.8 as a strategic Products with high First Increase sec/piece to less than 20 advantage. Time Quality Production seconds/piece Trim down the Quality ( FTQ) Capacity Raise First Time Quality (FTQ) Inspection Process from 58% to bigger tan 90%. Release work force Have the most qualified, from Mechanical Provide New Increase the welding and value motivated and committed Operations to include Value Added added production throughput teams adding more value to more value added Operations between 25% an 50%. the Operation operations – Ready to Assemble Parts 2.2 Project Benefits 2.2.1 Stakeholders Figure 2.1 lists the most important stakeholders; we have divided them into external and internal suppliers or customers. Figure 2.1: Stakeholders (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) External Suppliers External Customers Wire Supplier OEM’ Suppliers Metal Parts Suppliers OEM’s Other Parts in Consignment Process Manufacturing Eng. Product Eng. Quality / Production Internal Customers Internal Suppliers Operations Department Human Resource Department Finance Department Purchasing Department Sales and Marketing Department 10 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 11. 2.2.2 Benefits The project benefits are classified in the five categories of the Global Manufacturing System (GMS): People, Quality, Response Capacity, Cost and Environment Figure 2.2: Benefits (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) Response People Quality Cost Environment Capacity 1. Cleaner/Safer working 1. Increase environment, less 1. Savings in the cost lubricants, grease, Professional 1. Increase Development of the of production by production debris. Production Volume 2. Use less energy labor force 1. Improve FTQ for Capacity 20% production process and fluids in 2. Elevate the 2.Increase product 2. Opportunity production technical level of the 2. Increase Portfolio Cost to product 3. Less noise and labor force productivity and 3. Add value added more value added distraction in the efficiency of the components, and parts production process 3. Add better paying 3. Motivate Wokers production line assemblies 4. Reduction of jobs for Cost Reduction 4. Add Flexible Mfg. Incidents and 4. Increase Production Ideas Accidents Empowerment 5. Improve Ergonomic and Working Environment Conditions HOW The new Equipment The new assembly will increase line will require productivity and sophisticated , state production capacity. of the art automated The new automated The new equipment equipment, with equipment will will allow release of Include automated Implement a Lean better control, contribute to a equipment in the and Clean flow of the labor force to technical skills and more stable and add new added wire gauge checking, materials. Introduce management precise production value processes, wire forming and the automated decision. The labor process giving better welding production equipment to increasing the force will be quality of parts at a product portfolio. stations to decrease reduce mechanical involved in this and faster production Develop a Flexible production takt time operations. future cost rate. Operations design to reduction initiative produce for a variety with bonus pays per of parts and suggestion ideas. volumes. 11 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 12. 2.3 Statement of work 2.3.1 Project Summary Table 2.2: Project Description Client/Vendor name Production Department Client/Vendor’s administrator PMO Automation of Spring/Wire Form Project name Production Line Engagement duration 43 Weeks th Begin date May 5 , 2010 nd End date March 2 , 2011 2.3.2 Scope The project will design, develop and implement the automation of the Springs and Wire Forms assembly line within a $2.5million budget in a 43 week period. The Project will include facility design, equipment and process design, procurement of new equipment, installation of equipment, accommodations of assembly line space, training and manufacturing validation of the new production assembly line. More details on the scope development will be explained on section 4.3. 2.3.3 Phases and Milestones Table 2.3: Phases and Milestones (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) Pase Completion date Pase rd Project Planning Phase June 3 , 2010 rd Program Initiation June 3 , 2010 th Manufacturing Design Phase- Execution September 7 , 2010 th Layout Design June 30 , 2010 th Equipment Design July 14 , 2010 nd Engineering Data Release August 2 , 2010 st Procurement Phase-Execution December 21 , 2010 st Purchase Orders September 1 , 2010 st Equipment Development and Shipping December 21 , 2010 nd Production/Validation Phase –Completion March 2 , 2011 st Installation of Equipment January 26 , 2011 nd Validation of Equipment March 2 , 2011 12 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 13. 2.3.4 Schedule of Rates - Labor Additional overtime hours are required for professional staff to account for action plan in procurement, engineering and installation of new equipment from Vendor B. See section 6 for more details. (Detailed information on each labor resource is provided in Appendix B). Table 2.4: Schedule of Rates (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) Item description Quantity Avg. Delivery Cost Cost Rate/hour schedule Baseline Baseline (Man - ours) Modified 2 Professional Staff 18 $29.14 7,417 $199,706 $216,141 (Engineers, Managers, Supervisors) Operations Staff 16 $16.50 4,800 $79,233 $79,233 (Line Operators) Current Operations Staff 42 $15.42 12,600 $194,319 $194,319 ( Line Operators, Inspectors) Totals $473,258.58 $489,693.24 2.3.5 Equipment and Materials A 5% increase on price for new equipment: Wire Gauge Checkers and Wire Forming CNC, is to be added to the modified Baseline once the negotiations are revised with Vendor B. See section 6 for more details. (Detailed information on Equipment and Materials is provided in Appendix B). Table 2.5: Equipment Rates (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) 3 Cost Cost Item description Quantity Rate/unit Baseline Baseline Modified Computer 5 $2,000.00 $10,000.00 $10,000.00 Terminal Wire Gauge 2 $ 150,000.00 $300,000.00 $315,000.00 Checkers Wire Forming CNC 5 $ 210,000.00 $1,050,000.00 $1,102,500.00 Robotic Welders 2 $ 205,000.00 $410,000.00 $410,000.00 Totals $1,770,000 $1,837,500 2 Delivery Schedule for Baseline was 6,290 hours not including additional hours for unexpected event (section 6) 3 Rates/Units for modified baseline increased 5% for Wire Gauge Checkers ($157,500) and Wire Formers ($220,500) 13 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 14. 2.3.6 General Administration, Contingency, Others Additional cost for trips, General Administration/Overhead are included as part of this project only. Table 2.6: Other Costs (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) Item Description Cost Cost Baseline Baseline Modified General Administration $109,123 109,123 Trips $10,000 $10,000 Contingency $215,127 $131,191 Totals $334,250 $250,314 2.3.7 Summary of Total Cost The total cost (modified) did not changed. All action plans cost to activate new Vendor B will be absorbed by the Contingency Budget, hence reducing this contingency figure to $131,192.00 .(Detailed information on cost on Section 4) Figure 2.3:Cost Distribution Chart (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) Table 2.7 : Summary Cost Structure (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) 14 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 15. 2.3.8 Payment terms No including contingency. Project Manager’s professional fees are prorated on the overall project. (Detailed information on Payments is provided in Appendix C) Table 2.8: Payment Schedule (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) Pase Completion date Payments due Payments due Baseline Baseline Modified rd Project Planning Phase June 3 , 2010 $1,320 $1,320 th Manufacturing Design Phase- Execution September 7 , 2010 $48,845 $48,845 Procurement Phase-Execution December 21, 2010 $1,353,065 $1,419,573 nd Operations/Validation Phase –Completion Marc 2 , 2011 $781,228 $798,655 15 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 16. 2.3.9 Statement of work – Assumptions Table 2.9: Assumptions (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) Product Operations/ Quality uman Resources IT Management- Engineering Production/Supply Presidency/Finance Small to Mid-Size Springs Intension to Keep New Current First Higher Tecnical Current ERP Top Management and Wire Forms Products Production Rate, Time Quality is Labor Force will System in place Endorsement Desire to increase 58% be demanded for Material and Production Capacity Cost control Material Sapes & Current Operations 3 There are two This is a Non- DesignCAD/CAM VSM Worksop Results Specifications: .004 inches Shifts – 8 hours. The Six Sigma Belts Union Facility systems in Place. for improvement and to 2.0 inches in two lines will produce Simulation opportunities diameter,round wire simultaneously during Production ,square wire , rectangular validation Systems in Place wire, special section wire Body Types open-coiled , Lead Average Time to Will follow the Future New Computer, The Project will Follow helical shaped usually coiled Produce One Part is 8 Quality Valve Placement of CNC systems will the Global with a constant diameter, hours Review – Stage Employees will need to be Development Plan of though they can be Gate Plan be required. installed and the Company produced in hourglass, cone HR Plan is callibrated. Added and barrel shapes required. Less to the TPM plan labor force will be required Materials spring steel ,high Current Production Quality Must keep some New Equipment Payments Plan for carbon steel, low carbon Average is 3000 Parts Inspection of part of the labor will be syncronize Equipment steel , nickel plated carbon per day Production in force for value with Andon 25% @Deposit steel, stainless alloys, non- place added Production 25% @ Reception ferrous metals: elgiloy, operations System 25% @ Validation astelloy, monel, inconel, 25% @Installation Titanium Presence of testing Lab with No Space Layout Will work along Must identify Materials an Durability Constraints with Product high and low Equipment Engineering for performers Product Validation on new production Equipment Equipmet Cost already higher paying includes Insurance rates will come and Freigt Cost after new equipment installation for Operators Turnkey ( in-service) installation by supplier through validation of production New Automated and Development Equipment will be declared and covered by FloorShop Insurance Equipment Policy 16 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 17. 2.3.10 Change Management Process The change management process will follow three internal procedures: 1. Engineering/Process Change Notifications, release per engineering system 2. Freeze Design Dates – Red Zone will be in the project Schedule to submit changes to the Project Council during the Red Zone Stage 3. Scope Change – Any change in scope will be submitted to the PMO office and presented to the Project Council for approval For more detailed Change Management process refer to section 4.4 2.3.11 Engagement Related Expenses General Administration Expenses All payments and disbursement of money will be done through our Finance Department. All checks and bank transferred will need to be authorized and audited by our Finance department which will be the only entity authorized to release the funds. All Administration expenses will be accounted for in the Project Budget and will be released accordingly. Other departments may enter their cost, materials, resource request on our ERP (Enterprise Resource Planning) system for financial calculations and Finance approval and release. Payroll Payments of Payroll will be generated by the human Resource Department depending on the numbers of hours reported on the project. Finance will authorize and release payments for payroll purposes. Materials Material and Equipment payments will be generated by the Purchasing Department into the ERP system, and submitted for approval to Finance Department, which will be authorizing and releasing funds according to terms of payments agreed between Supplier and the Company. Any payment contract arrangements needs to be prepared and reviewed by the Purchasing Department and presented to the Finance Department for planning and provision purposes. 17 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 18. 2.3.12 Acceptance and authorization The terms and conditions of the Professional Services Agreement apply in full to the services and products provided under this Statement of Work. IN WITNESS WEREOF, the parties here to each acting with proper authority will authorize the execution of this Statement of Work. Full name Full name CEO – Automotive Parts, Inc Project Manager - PMO Title Title Signature Signature Date Date 18 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 19. 2.4 Project Plan 2.4.1 Technical Description of New System API conducted a Value Stream Mapping workshop to identify the opportunities for improvement and to streamline the production of springs and wire forms. Current Process A SIPOC (Supplier, Inputs, Process, Output and Customer) depicts the current process and flow of materials and information. A more detailed Value Stream Map of the current System is shown on Appendix D. The Value Stream Map shows clearly where the inventory (waste) time is, and finds where the Wiring Gauging, Wire Forming and Welding stations become bottlenecks in the production process. Figure 2.4: SIPOC Current Process (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) 19 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 20. 2.4.2 Facility Design and Simulation In order to avoid future errors and rework, we will be using AutoCAD and other Simulation Tools to design the new shop floor and simulate the production flow with the new equipment in place. Both the old and the new assembly line will run simultaneously for the period of the Manufacturing Validation Build of the new assembly Line. After production is validated the old equipment needs to be sold or scrapped within six month of project completion (this activity is considered out of the scope of the project) 2.4.3 Future Process The high Inventory time (waste) before wire inspection, wire forming and welding stations is creating bottlenecks, increasing the lead time of the production process. These three stations will be automated in order to increase throughput and production flow. To reduce the Lead Production Time and specially the Inventory Time and Changeover Time, the future process will incorporate three major automated equipments, which include CNC (Computer Numerical Control). These equipments will help release the inventory bottlenecks in the Gauge Checking, Wire Forming and Welding, making a more productive and efficient production flow. 2Electronic Wire Gauge Checkers 5Automated Wire Formers 2Robotic Welders Current and Future Value Stream Maps are shown in Appendix D. Figure 2.5 summarizes the main metrics from Current and Future Process. Current Process Future Process Variable Measure Variable Measure Lead Production Time 428 Minutes Lead Production Time <200 Minutes Value Added Time 246 Minutes Value Added Time >150 Minutes Non-Value Added Time 48 Minutes Non-Value Added Time 0-10 Minutes Inventory Time ( waiting Time) 134 Minutes Inventory Time ( waiting Time) <50 Minutes Takt Time (seconds/part) 28.8 seconds/part Takt Time (seconds/part) <20 seconds/part First Time Quality : 58% First Time Quality : 90% Change-Over time: 60 Minutes Change-Over time: <30 Minutes Figure 2.5: Process Performance Metrics (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) Figure 5: Process Metrics 20 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 21. 2.4.4 Detailed Project Schedule - Modified Figure 2.6 shows the progress of schedule when 26% of the worked has been completed. The Black Bar shows the Baseline Schedule; The Blue Bar shows Baseline Modified Schedule ; The Red Bar shows the Critical Path for the Baseline Modified Schedule Figure 2.6: Baseline Modified Schedule (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) 21 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 22. 2.4.5 Specific Challenges Specific challenges in the following areas of: Supply, Communication, Operations, Systems, People, Legal and Quality were all identified in our Risk Assessment, and included in our Risk Assessment Matrix, with Contingency plans. 2.4.6 Risk Management Matrix The Project Team will follow recommendations according to the detailed Risk Management Matrix considering the major and top risks on the projects and contingency action plans. Top Risks considered while developing the project schedule are shown in Table 2.10. The Baseline Modified Risk Assessment includes the new risk and contingency for Supplier Selection, and the current contingency plan that is currently in progress. Figure 2.7 summarizes the Risk Assessment considerations. Section 2.4.7 addresses action plans for Shipping and Hiring/Placement risks. Top major risks considered during project planning phase. Baseline Risk Matrix per activity attached on Appendix A. Table 2.10: Risk Matrix (Modified) (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) Risk Severity Activity Risk Type4 Prob. 1=Low Rank Contingency # 5=High 1 Shipping of Equipment Delays in Shipping for Avoid winter season by pulling Winter Season ahead project with overtime in SUP 85% 5 4.25 the Design Phase 2 Supplier Selection Late Change of Ensure suppliers are ranked Suppliers, limited among top Suppliers in the Suppliers SUP 75% 5 3.75 Industry. Have a Backup Supplier Plan Ready in Case selected Supplier fails to comply 3 Hiring/Placement Labor Conflicts for Avoid Labor Conflicts and new Entrants due to Stoppage by preparing an HR Potential Layoffs - R 65% 5 3.25 Placement Plan Ahead and Strike Presenting to Production Management 4 Displacement of Old Damage of production Avoid Damages by Equipment Equipment Using Experts in Transportation, OPE 65% 5 3.25 Include Equipment in Insurance Coverage before acquisition 5 Design Changes Late Design Changes Use ECN and Change Engineering Management Process for Engineering Change ENG 75% 4 3.00 Communication. Implement Red Zone and Freeze Date for Engineering Changes 4 SUP=Supply, HR=Human Resource, OPE=Operations, ENG=Engineering, QUA=Quality 22 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 23. Risk Severity Activity Risk Type Prob. 1=Low Rank Contingency # 5=High 6 Install/Calibration of Delays on installation Invite Supplier to Installation. Equipment due to complexity OPE 55% 5 2.75 Turnkey In Service Installation 7 Construction Safety Regulations not Revision of legal, permits and Requirements in Compliance ENG 50% 5 2.5 safety by Safety Committee 8 Engineering Testing Parts fails to Product Prepare Six Sigma Teams for Engineering/Quality QUA 50% 5 2.5 Action Plans Validation Compliance 9 Negotiations Set Target Price, Benchmark and Negotiations exceed SUP 75% 3 2.25 3 Quotation Process Budget 10 Equip. Fabrication Delays of fabrication Select Expert Suppliers and Visit due to complex of Manufacturing Engineering customization Development, include overtime SUP 55% 4 2.2 to pull ahead development dates. Have Two Alternatives Suppliers ready for contracts 11 Production Validation Worker’s absence due Prepare a list of Floater Pool to winter and lack of OPE 50% 4 2 workers as part of the HR Plan motivation Figure 2.7: Risk Summary Chart - Modified (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) Risk Assessment Summary 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4.25 4.25 4 4 4 3.25 3.25 3 3 2.75 2.5 2.5 2.25 2.2 2 85% 75% 75% 75% 65% 65% 55% 50% 50% 55% 50% Prob Rank Severity 23 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 24. 2.4.7 Top Risk Recommended Action Plans 1. Shipping/Weather Risk Table 2.11: Weather/Shipping Action Plan (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) CURRENT ALTERNATIVE Shipping of new equipment will be planned from Plan for overtime work during the Design and Purchasing November 2010 through February 2011, which is in the Activities will mitigate Shipping Risk, pulling ahead Project middle of winter Season, delaying the installation and Schedule almost 1 Month ahead and reducing total cost training of the project due to MVB1 and MVB2 synchronization COSTS (Only Project ) Project Cost – Expected Project Cost – Expected $2,232,654 $2,184,458 w/o Overtime with Overtime Project Cost – Pessimistic Project Cost – Pessimistic- 2,557,217 with Overtime + Winter Storm $2,389,912 w/o Overtime + Winter Storm Contingency Cost- Risk $324,563 Contingency Cost - Risk $205,454 Extra Overtime Cost – 342 ours $11,970 BENEFITS Delays and bigger Inbound Cost Better Working Shipping Schedule higher Shipping Fees Lower Shipping Fees Installation and Training over Christmas Avoid Christmas holidays work overlapping Expected Finish Project in March 28, 2011 Expected Finish Project in Marc 3,2011 Late Finish Risk August 10, 2011 Late Finish Risk April 26, 2011 Labor Overtime Plan to Mitigate Shipping Risk Table 2.12: Overtime Proposal (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) Tasks Resource Overtime Rate Total hrs Labor Layout Design Facility Engineer 80 35 $2800 Equipment Design Process Engineer 54 35 $1890 Equipment Design Systems Engineer 20 35 $700 Equipment Design Material Engineer 27 35 $945 Procurement Buyer 81 35 $2835 Equipment Development Manufacturing Engineer 40 35 $1400 Equipment Development Supplier 40 35 $1400 Total 342 $11,970 24 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 25. 2. Hiring/Placement Risk Table 2.13: Labor Conflicts Action Plan (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) CURRENT ALTERNATIVE Total: 42 Workers Total : 16 Workers 8 Wire Gauge Checkers 2 Gauge Operators 3 Gauge Inspectors 5 Wire Forming Operators Shift 1 10 Wire Forming Operators Shift 1 5 Wire Forming Operators Shift 2 8 Wire Forming Operators Shift 2 2 Welders Operators Shift 1 4 Wire Forming Operators Shift 3 2 Welders Operators Shift 2 5 Welders Shift 1 + 3 Welders Shift 2 HR Distribution of 26 Workers: 1 Welders Shift 3 46% - 12 Workers Placement with Suppliers and OEM’s 15% - 4 Floaters 27% - 7 Workers Trained for Value Added Operations 12% - 3 Workers Low Performers COSTS Cost/Mont $103,636 Cost/Mont $42,257 Probability of Work Probability of Work %65 <%20 Stoppage Stoppage BENEFITS Mechanical Labor Automated and Controlled Labor High Risk to incidents and accidents, Reduce the incidents and accidents, Safety and Health issues Increase ergonomics Higher Fixed Cost Lower Fixed cost Technical Skills Development Professional Technical Development High Takt time, low Productivity Low Takt time, higher Productivity Professional Career Stagnation Career Growth Opportunities in Top Companies High gaps to negotiate placement of labor force Close gap to negotiate placement of labor force Human Resource Action Plan to Mitigate Risk Table 2.14: Replacement Proposal (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)  Identify job opportunities with higher paying salaries for those employees that will be released from their duties. Placement  Employees should not be laid off until an acceptable position in a OEM’s or Supplier has been arranged and contracted  Identify those employees who will remain in the organization as on-call in the organization. Floater  These group of employees can rotate in different positions as required, and can rd be prepare for future 3 shift or production increments  Identified High Performer Workers to remain in the organization and trained for Trainees value added operations.  Workers who will need to be laid off due to their low performance Low Performers 25 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 26. 3. Automated Equipment The Project intends to install state of the art new equipment for the facility. However, this new equipment is sophisticated and should be calibrated by experts. There is a risk to delay the installation, setup and validation of equipment, assuming proper training and assistance is not in place. It is recommended to close a Turnkey in Service installation from Equipment Supplier. This means the supplier will accompany the team of engineers during the installation, training, setup and validation of production. With this action it is intended to mitigate the uncertainty of setup, functioning and operation of new equipment, while training the group of engineers for future control, operation and maintenance of new equipment. The New Equipment will have period of guarantee of 90 days and will require maintenance assistance from the Vendor periodically. A new Contingency Plan for OEM Supplier Change is explained on section 6.0 26 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 27. 2.5 Project Completion Plan 2.5.1 Deliverables 27 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600 Figure 2.8: Project Completion/Deliverables (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)
  • 28. 2.5.2 Acceptance Test The Project will follow the Program Quality and Readiness Review (PQRR) as a Stage Gate Model. Different Review Valves will allow for checking of metrics, deliverables and buying off before proceeding to the next Stage of the Project. There are nine (9) Review Valves as follow: Table 2.15: Stage Gate Reviews (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) Gate Name Initials Objectives 1. Preliminary Plan Review PP Test Preliminary Project Information 2. Program Initiation Review PI Test Project Plan, Team Structure and Initiation 3. Manufacturing Engineering MP Test Engineering Design and R Planning Review 4. Verify Data Release Review VDR Validate Engineering Documentation for Procurement 5. Contract Sign-Off CSO Validated Procurement and Contract with External Suppliers 6. Production/ Operations POD Test readiness of Operations/ Production Review 7. Manufacturing Validation MVB Validation new equipment and parts out of new production line Build I I 8. Manufacturing Validation MVB Validation new equipment and parts out of new production line Build II II 9. Start of Regular Production SORP Final Approval and Sign-off to regular production, Cost validation Figure 2.9 represents the Acceptance Test to define when a PQRR Valve should be Approved, Revised or Stopped. Figure 2.9: Acceptance Test Chart (Motors, 2006) 28 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 29. 2.5.3 Acceptance Sign-off Cart Figure 2.10 shows a check list of items to be completed at each Review Valve Figure 2.10: Acceptance Criteria/Sign-0ff Chart (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) 29 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 30. 3 Management Proposal 3.1 Corporate Organizational Structure API has a Matrix Organization structured based on Projects. The Project Team will report directly to the Project Manager for task related projects, also they will report to operations and functional managers from different departments. Figure 3.1: Corporate Organizational Chart (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) President CEO Owen French Project Monitoring Director of Director of Supply and Director of Sales and Finance & Controlling Engineering Operations Procurement Human Marketing Director Director, Dick Ives Director Resources Director Product Manufacturing Quality Materials Production Purchasing Finance Engineering Engineering Manager Manager Manager HR Manager Sales/Marketing Manager Manager Manager Manager Manager Quality Materials Production Production Safety Finance Project Product Facility Supervisor Maintenance Buyer HR Engineer Engineer Supervisor Ergonomics Auditor Manager A Engineer Engineer Shift 1 Engineer Specialist Salesperson Shift 2 Supervisor Testing Industrial Production Production Marketing Engineer Engineer Workers Workers Specialist Product Engineer System Engineer Manufacturing Engineer 30 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 31. 3.1.1 Corporate Roles and Responsibilities The purpose of the Corporate Responsibility Matrix ( table 3.1) is to assign departments or individuals to activity categories, define role responsibilities, and define relationships between groups. This matrix should be completed before detailed resource allocating or scheduling. The goals of the roles and responsibilities matrix are to:  Define roles and responsibilities of project stakeholders.  Improve overall project team and stakeholder communication.  Proactively identify gaps in assignments, accountability, or resources.  Clarify cross-functional interactions between project team members.  Document project interdependencies with other enterprise initiatives.  Define project team interactions with supporting resources and departments. Table 3.1: Corporate Responsibility Matrix (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) Project Activity (Spring Automation) Organization Title Project Requirements Design Test Training Communication Project Management: Monitoring & R C S A/R S Controlling Engineering A/R/C A/R/C R/C C S Finance S C Operations/ Production/ S S S S/C R Manufacturing Supply and A/C S C/S Procurement Human Resources C/S A/R KEY: A – Accountable for successful completion of task. R – Responsible for completion of task. (Task can be delegated to this person.) S – Supports task. C – Requirements communication about the task. 31 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 32. Table 3.2: Corporate Roles & Responsibilities (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) Title Role Responsibilities Project Manager The Project Manager is responsible for  Project Plan developing, in conjunction with the Project  Manage and lead the project team. Sponsor, the project charter. The Project  Manage the coordination of the partners Manager ensures that the project is delivered and the working groups. on time, within budget, and to the required quality standards.  Develop and maintain a detailed project plan. Engineering The Engineering department’s role is to  Layout, Facility Design Perform as a manager or project systems  Construction Plan and Requirements engineer for a complex project (e.g. several  Regulations and Permits distinct subsystems or other defined services, capabilities, or products and their associated  Requirement and Specs. Development interfaces).  Process Assembly Instructions  Tools and Equipment Requirement Specs.  Standard Procedures Operation Sheets  Visual Aids  Simulation of Production  Testing  Total Productive Maintenance  Quality/Engineering Product Testing Plan  Engineering Review Valve Finance Once the organization as established goals  Audits of Financials and associated strategies (or ways to reach the goals), funds are set aside for the resources and labor to the accomplish goals and tasks. As the money is spent, statements are changed to reflect what was spent, how it was spent and what it obtained. Review of financial statements is one of the more common methods to monitor the progress of programs and plans. The most common financial statements include the balance sheet, income statement and cash flow statement. The major work of the  Installation Plan Project accomplished (i.e., design, Operations/  Simultaneous Production Plan development, construction, production, Production/ testing, system activation, etc.).  Manufacturing Validation Plan  Training 32 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 33. Title Role Responsibilities Supply and The role of Procurement is to understand the  RFP Procurement project management process, utilize specific  Bidding procurement needs during the life cycle of the  Negotiation project including solicitation methods (RFI/RFQ/RFP), total cost of ownership  Supplier Selection analysis, cost/price analysis, negotiation, and  Assess Performance understanding the benefit of integrating the procurement tools. Human Resources  Labor hiring Perform structured analysis of skill types and quantities; use resource scheduling estimates;  Recruitment Planning plot graph of staffing requirements versus  Ensure Training. actual and report status periodically. Determine skill levels from work package estimates; identify experience requirements and gap analysis; use metrics as critical success factor; plan hiring and training to meet details. 33 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 34. Work Package 1.3.3.2 has been added 3.2 Project Organizational plan 1.0 after unexpected event – Vendor Springs Assembly Selection Change. This new package is Line Automation 3.2.1 Work Breakdown Structure Project required to review all specs, requirements and drawings of new vendor B according to the future layout and production and process design 1.1 1.2 1.3 General Admin Contingency Project 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.3.4 Project Manufacturing Procurement Production/Operations Planning 1.3.2.1 1.3.4.1 Layout 1.3.3.1 Design Installation 1.3.1.1 Purchasing Preliminary Plan 13.2.2 1.3.4.2 Tools/Equip Maintenance Design 1.3.3.2 Training 1.3.1.2 New Tool/Specs Communication 13.2.3 Revision 1.3.4.3 Plan Process Design Human Resources 1.3.2.4 1.3.3.3 1.3.4.4 Buildout Tooling MVB Training Development/ 1.3.2.5 Shipping 1.3.4.5 Manufacturing Validation Plan Finance Audit 34 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600 Figure 3.2: WBS (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)
  • 35. 3.2.2 Project Organizational Structure Figure 3.3: Project Organizational Structure (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) Bob Johnson Project Manager Dick Ives Project Planning Director Director of Director of Director of Director of Director of Human Engineering Operations Supply Finance Resources Manufact Product Materials Production Equipment Fianancial Engineering Engineering Quality Manager HR Specialist Manager Manager Buyer Auditor Manager Manager Safety Materials Production Production Maintenance Facility Engineer Testing Engineer Quality Engineer Ergonomics Engineer Supervisor Shift 1 Supervisor Shift 2 Engineer Supervisor Industrial Wire Gauge Wire Gauge Engineer Operators (2) Operators(2) Systems Wire Form Wire Form Engineer Operators (5) Operators(5) Manufacturing Robots Welders Robots Welders Engineer (2) Operators (2) Operators (2) Project Team Members Support to Project Team 35 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 36. 3.2.3 Project Team Table 3.3: Project Team Roles & Responsibilities (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) Title Project Role Responsibility Project Planning Ensure that project does not conflict with API goals. Provide assistance Project Director as needed to ensure completion of tasks. Ensure API Board is aware of Sponsor status. Project Manager Drive project tasks to completion. Ensures that project expenses Project remain within budget. Ensure Project Completion on estimated Timing Manager Director of Engineering Ensure Design and Engineering Practices are in place and according to Engineering Support API Standards and Regulations Manufacturing Engineering Ensure Manufacturing Design and Engineering Practices are in place Engineering Support and according to API Standards and Regulations Manager Facility Engineer Project Team Provide project support with coordination of facility requirements. Industrial Engineer Provide project support with coordination of Lean Manufacturing Project Team Design, Ergonomics and Safety facility, Material Flow Design and requirements. Manufacturing Lead the integration of equipment, layout and process design to Engineer completion. Supervise the construction of new equipment, installation Project Team and functioning. Prepare Manufacturing Validation Plan and implementation Product Engineering Engineering Ensure Product Design Compliance with functional, dimensional, Manager Support durability and reliability specs. Testing Engineer Perform Test routines in finished products for design validation Project Team according to specs Director of Operations Ensure Operations are planned according to assembly line design, Operations Support manage resources for production, maintenance, safety and ergonomics Quality Manager Operations Ensure Quality Audits and Inspection Plans are in place to prevent Support defects and promote improvement of operations Quality Engineer Design the Quality Plan for the Automated Assembly line, inspection Project Team stations and Audits Plans Material Handling Operations Coordinate the Material Flow in the Operations Manager Support Material Supervisor Perform Rack Design, Basket and Market Design, Feeding Racks, and Project Team Material Flow Scheduling Safety & Ergonomics Ensure all Safety Regulations and Ergonomics Practices are in place and Project Team Supervisor within regulations Production Manager Coordinate Production Schedule, Manage and Assign Resources, Production Coordinate Production Operations Support 36 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 37. Title Project Role Responsibility Wire Gauge Project Team Ensure proper selection of wire supply, ready to feed the assembly line. Operators Wire Form Ensure proper control and use of Wire Forming Equipment, Production Project Team Operators of Scheduled Wire Forms Robotic Welders Ensure proper operations of value added operations: welding, Project Team Operators assemblies, others. Maintenance Prepare Preventive and Corrective Maintenance Plans for new Engineer Equipment and New tooling. Define a DFMEA (Design Failure and Project Team Mode Analysis) for Risky factors in the operations. Train, Supervise Plans for work force Supply Procurement Ensure Materials and Procurements are supplied on time and Director Supply according to production schedule. Ensure purchase orders and Support procurement process complies with internal control procedures. Control cost of materials and Contract Agreements Equipment Buyer Prepare Request for Proposal, Bid Solicitations, Rounds of Negotiations, Supplier Selection and Business Assignment. Ensure Project Team Suppliers comply with requirements and quality expected according to the SOR (State of Requirements). Define payments terms and purchase order release. Director of Human Labor Force Ensure proper hiring, placement and training, payroll and benefits of Resources Support the organization. Human Resource Prepare Placement and hiring Plan of new and transferred employees, Specialist Project Team prepare and support the training plan for new operations and equipment. Finance Director Financial Ensure project Cost is in control and within budget. Support Internal Control Control Procedures Support Finance Auditor Help the project Manager control cost and report any deviations from the Budget. Help Prepare actions plans and reports for Management Project Team Reviews. Define, Review and Approve new Cost Structure for Production. 37 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 38. 3.2.4 Responsibility Matrix Blue text lines represent Tasks Activities for Working Packages. Package 1.3.3.2: New Tools /Equipment Revision Specs was added to the Responsibility Matrix to validate specifications and requirements of Vendor B. Figure 3.4: Project Team Responsibility Matrix- Modified (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) Acronyms: 38 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 39. WBS= Work Breakdown Structure SOP’s = Standard Operating Procedures RFP = Request for Proposal MVB = Manufacturing Validation Build SORP = Start of Regular Production R=Responsible A=Accountable S= Support I= Information C= Consult 39 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 40. 4 Management Systems 4.1 Supplier, Selection and Management 4.1.1 Overview - Procurement of Automated Machines and Robots The Procurement process is lead by our Purchasing Department under the procedure shown in Table 4.1 and Figure 4.1. The internal procedure requires minimum of 3 Vendors for bidding and negotiations. Selection Criteria, Scoring and Final results for vendor selection are shown on section 4.1.2. Electro Measure was the selected vendor, however and due to financial struggles negotiations with Vendor B are retaken to change OEM vendor as explained in Action Plan Section 6. Table 4.1: Procurement Process Procedures Define Requirements Request and Evaluate Bids from Select a Source and Negotiate Contract Carry out the and Develop Potential Sources Terms Contract and Pursue Purchasing Plan Continuous Improvement The first step in the Purchasing automated machines is not a After the initial bids have been received, The contract must be purchasing process is to simple matter of transferring pattern evaluated and ranked, the qualifying, best-value completed by two define the product numbers and quantity desired from the bids will be selected. If the component is well actions: on-time delivery requirements and engineering bill of materials to a defined in terms of simple shape/complexity and of a fully qualified develop a purchasing purchase order. Careful consideration of of relatively low risk, the quotation may be product at the agreed plan. Product technical quality, quantity and schedule sufficient for closing the contract and moving into cost by the vendor and requirements are based factors is necessary to ensure that all production. prompt and timely on technical pertinent and important information is payment by the buyer. performance and targets supplied to the vendor. However, for the more complex, additional During the life of the for quality, quantity, engineering design and contract negotiation may contract, all parties have schedule and cost. With The vendor should receive a design be required to reach final agreement. Specifically, a valuable stake in this information, a layout of the machine part or the it may be necessary to: continuous improvement complete and accurate existing machining that the automated 1. perform a final review and refinement of the in quality, delivery and request for quotation machines will be replacing. If the vendor design for manufacturability with the design best value. Specific issues can be drafted. is to provide the most suitable and engineer that must be considered useful components, it is important that 2. finalize technical, quality and schedule during the production the buyer indicates the areas to be requirements; cycle include: • open and machined and the locating points for 3. review and resolve non-technical contractual timely communication machining. issues. (by visits, phone calls, e- In contract negotiations, all parties should mail, etc.) between consider the following factors: • the level and customer and supplier on In addition, the buyer must know and project status, shortfalls, understand the critical factors in scope of technical service, including design consultation, production, quality control and potential problems, specifying components and how those forecasted changes and factors impact production and costs. product improvement: 1. detailed instructions and guidance on opportunities for value specifications and quality assurance improvement; A request-for-quotation will provide requirements • monitoring of quality, component requirements to develop a 2. assigned responsibilities for and integration of delivery, cost and comprehensive and detailed supporting engineering activities among the performance by both the approach. It supplies the vendor with different production activities. supplier and the complete information on requirements 3. cost of quality assessment (rejects delays, customer; and enables the vendor to make an rework, etc.) • identification of accurate price quotation. 4. scheduling and lead-time planning opportunities to improve 5. product liability. quality and increase value to the final customer by the customer and supplier. 40 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 41. Figure 4.1: Procurement Process (Garrett, 2007) 4.1.2 Production-Line Equipment Vendors The Equipment Vendor selection consists of a three-step process. The criteria for vendor selection is based on five (5) categories5 as shown below with their corresponding weight factors: 5 Selection Criteria and Vendor Evaluation Forms from Excel Vendor Evaluation Analysis Template 41 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 42. Based on the scoring of the three top vendors, Electro Measure was selected to supply the Automated Wire Gauge Checkers and Wire Forming equipment, with a score of 94.50. However, due to financial struggles of Electro Measure, Vendor B has been considered for a new contract negotiation for the Wire Gauge and Wire Forming Equipment. Vendor B was previously selected for the Robotics Welders, since this is their field of expertise. The fabrication and shipping of the robotic equipment continues as planned in the original baseline schedule. 42 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 43. 4.1.3 Computer Vendors API’s computers for the automation project will be acquired through the office supply procurement process of its normal operating procedures. All other office supplies for administration duties will be acquired through the normal operating procedures for office supplies. All office supplies or equipment budgeted for this project will follow the normal operating procedures for procurement of office supplies. Therefore, for all office supplies or equipment for this project, there will be no RFP or bid process. 4.1.4 Contract Close-Out The Contract Close-Out with selected vendors will be following the complete assessment and checklist as shown in Appendix H. A Contract Memorandum is to be written and signed by both parties as a closure on the contract agreement and delivery of service. API CONTRACT CLOSEOUT MEMORANDUM AGREEMENT NUMBER: RECIPIENT: PERFORMANCE COMPLETION/DELIVERABLES: Recipient as satisfactorily completed performance and delivered all required reports/documentation. Recipient submitted final expenditure report on __________ and final technical report on ___________. [Explain actions taken.] PAYMENT: Payment Terms will be a fixed price payable in 4 different stages: 25% Deposit at contract agreement, 25% at delivery, 25% at installation, 25% at training and service validation. OTER CLOSEOUT ISSUES: all contract terms will be according the Terms and Conditions explained in the contract agreement. Based on my review of the agreement and closeout documentation, I have determined that all administrative actions are complete and that the agreement may be closed. Financial Auditor DateWorksheet and Checklist for Close-out terms are to be attached to this memo. 43 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 44. 4.2 Monitoring Cost and Schedule 4.2.1 Overview Figure4.2 represents a flow chart for monitoring control, each box is sequenced from 1 to 14 to define the procedure that will determine any change in cost or schedule. Figure 4.2: Monitoring Process (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) 44 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 45. 4.2.2 Labor Cost and Schedule Labor cost was divided in three different categories: 1. Professional Staff consisting of engineers, managers and Supervisors 2. Operations Staff: Operators for the new equipped assembly line 3. Current Operations Staff: Operators, Inspectors and Assembly Line workers of current operation, which will participate in the validation and transfer of operations to the new Automated Assembly Line Tables 4.2 and 4.3 show the Labor Cost and Schedule Rates for each of the labor resources. Schedule and Cost are revised according to the Baseline Modified scenario. Baseline Cost is shown on Appendix B. Table 4.2: Salary Labor Cost (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) 45 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 46. 6 Table 4.3: Hourly Labor (Automated Line) Cost (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) 7 Table 4.4: Hourly (Current Line) Labor Cost (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) 6 (1)resource for Shift 1 ; (2) resource for shift 2 7 (1) resource for Shift 1 ; (2) resource for shift 2 ; (3) resource shift 3 46 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 47. 4.2.3 Major Equipment Cost and Schedule As explained in section 2.4.3, the future process will require automated equipment to improve the production flow. The list of equipments remains the same after the Baseline Modified explained in section 6. Table 4.5 shows updated equipment cost for Vendor B with a 5% increment from the baseline budget (seen on table 2.5 and Appendix B). This additional cost will be absorbed by the contingency budget. Table 4.5: Equipment Cost (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) 4.2.4 Contingency, Administration and Others Cost Contingency Cost was initially estimated at $215,123. The current problem we are facing with the Supplier Selection will require $83,935 to be deducted from the Contingency Budget to stay within the Planned Schedule and Budget. More details will be explained in the Cost Section 5.0. Table 4.6 shows the Baseline Modified Budget for Administration, Travel and the remaining Contingency Budget. Table 4.6: Contingency Cost and Others (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) 47 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 48. 4.3 Management of Scope and Change Orders 4.3.1 Overview Table 4.7: Change Management Process (Services, 2010) Change Request Process Roles and Responsibilities Notes Team Lead initiates Change Request by Originate change requests based on • Requests resulting in changes to the vendor completing the Change Request Information implementation needs using contract require approval from the Project section on the Change Request Form and approved forms and communication Sponsor. submitting to Project Managers. processes. Requests from team • No changes to the contract should be acted upon members should be discussed with or conveyed as an approved change until we have the appropriate Team Lead prior to verified that we are in compliance with the original submitting an official change contract. request. • Changes to Equipment, Software, budget, or contracted ours will be reviewed, managed and approved by the Project Manager. • First priority will be given to change requests for mission-critical functions and/or services. Project Managers review with Team Lead; Facilitate the completion of change Other criteria for evaluating change requests will identify needed information and next steps to requests and information gathering. be approved by the Change Review Team. complete; enter into Change Request Log. Project Work directly with vendors (e.g. • Project Scope Change Management Plan managers communicate and coordinate (as services or software estimate) and Documents: needed) with appropriate personnel to gather with appropriate personnel, o Change Request Form needed information. administrative and academic offices o Change Request Log (e.g. workarounds, changes to o Scope Change Management Plan policies and procedures) to collect information needed to complete the request. Implementation Project Managers prepare and submit Change Request Impact Analysis section and submit to the Change Management Team. Institution Implementation Team receives weekly Receive updates of completed updates of pending change requests and provides change requests pending approval. input as needed / requested. Provide input as needed/requested. Change Management Team approves/denies Evaluate, allow or disallow change change request, provides Final Recommendation requests based on the submitted on the Change Request Form and advises project information. Call upon the Project Managers. Manager and Team Leads to provide additional information as needed to complete review. Escalate resolution to Executive Steering Committee as needed. If appropriate, forward for review and disposition. Project Managers communicate the decision to: a. The Team Lead making the request of the Change Review Team decision. b. Implementation Team. c. All Project Managers and appropriate interested parties. d. Makes appropriate entries into the Change Management Request Log. Modify Implementation plan and documentation as needed to incorporate approved change. 48 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 49. 4.3.2 Development of Scope The scope of the project is evaluated within the operational tasks. There are working tasks to be within scope and out of scope. The Project is to remain within the following scope: project planning, facility design, manufacturing, production, procurement, installation, quality and validation. In-Scope Project Planning •Organize Project Team , Project Structure, Schedule and Activities. Earned Value Analysis (SPI CPI ) , Risk Management, Develop the Control and Working Plan of the project. Develop the communication plan, reports and formats to follow, develop a new Stage Gate Process for Valve approval. Facility Design •Design the new facility layout, define safety and ergonomics to comply with lean manufacturing standards. Develop the new Statement of Requirements (SOR) for new equipment to include in the new layout. Define new product and raw material requirements to feed the new assembly line. Manufacturing/Production •New Jigs and Tooling Development and Design Plan , Production line balancing/leveling, Production Volume/Capacity study, definition of new takt time, production plan learning curve, production plan training and work force requirements. New tools and equipment for material transportation to and inside the assembly line. Build Out plan to replace old assembly line with new assembly line layout. Incorporation of some Lean Manufacturing visual aids and layout, and flexibel manufacturing design. Procurement •Ensure to follow the Statement of Requirements issued by Manufacturing Engineering for new Tools, Jigs and Equipment, Rounds of Quotations, Negotiations, and Award of new equipment business. Installation of Tools and Equipment •Define the equipment installation plan, •Layout setup, equipment initial setup, electrical/utilities, water, air outlets installation, jigs installation, painting and signage installation. Also hiring of contractors for installation of equipment and tooling development. Quality/Manufacturing Validation •Define the validation and quality plan to validate production on new assembly line, audit of new production, quality control and inspection points, manufacturing production ramping plan, approval of production badges, dimensional plan, product engineering, bench and durability test plan, start of regular production. 49 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 50. 4.3.3 Out-of-Scope Items Out of Scope Detailed Quotation or Negotiation Strategies •This project will not include activities regarding RFP or Quotation Strategies. As a customer to the Procurement Process, Manufacturing Engineering will only consider the input timing given by the Purchasing Department, only controlling the bidding of RFP preparations based on the Statement of Requirements, and the output, a supplier selection. Revenues and Financials •This project will not control payments or bank disbursement. While controlling project Cost, any payments will be done through the regular financial methods of the company. Also the Revenues and potential new revenues will not be estimated in this project Sales and Marketing Strategies for new production capacity •The project will not cover neither promotion strategies for the new production capacity nor the reach of new sales targets or customers. Testing, Engineering Validation •This project will not address any new equipment or improvements of the quality or testing of finished products New Pricing Structure •The project will not establish the new price per product, the outcome of the project should be use as an input to establish new pricing structures. Shipping/Material Handling of input supply or output finished Products •The Project will not control any logistics, loading and unloading of shipped materials, regarding the supply inputs, material handling or shipping prior or after the assembly line process. Warrantee and Claims Issues • The project will not cover the warrantee claim process. Manufacturing/Production •The Project will not cover the incorporation of a Total Lean Manufacturing Implementation or Just In Time implemeation, this are separate projects to be considered in later or parallel with a different Project Team after the Automation project is in place. 50 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 51. 4.3.4 Documentation of Change of Scope The process for Change Request is shown on figure 4.3. In order to request a change, Change Request Form (Appendix E ) needs to be filled out, explaining details on the problem or scope change. This information is added to the Problem Resolution System to share with the Project Team. The changes are submitted to the appropriate Change Committee for Approval, Rejection (Deny) or Revision (Undecided) Figure 4.3: Change Management Process (Nicholas & Steyn, 2008) Change Management Process FlowChart.igx Change Generated Yes De facto? No Document ( Change Proposal or Request) No Yes Review Change Minor Committe or Control Board Change? Individual Formal Review Change Commitee Undecided Approve Deny Update System configuration Futher Analysis and Project Plan Implement Changes Notify Monitor Customer and Changes Other affected Stakeholders 51 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 52. 4.4 Quality Management 4.4.1 Overview The Quality Management Process is controlled through the Program Quality Revision Review (PQRR), which defines different stages in the Project to be evaluated for Performance Metrics. The Completion Plan on section 2.5 summarizes the PQRR reviews, deliverables and task to complete on each stage. Each review will have a supplier and customer, who will buy off the review, if all deliverables and items for that review are completed and if the metrics (shown in figure 2.5.3 Acceptance Sign-off) are in compliance. The Acceptance criteria (seen on Figure 2.5.4) will define the actions to take at each review. Additional action plans may be drawn from each review if the review is close in yellow status. The Quality System will be defined by identifying and tracking the performance and metrics for working packages and tasks. Work Packages are shown in Figure 4.5. More detailed information about the inputs, process and outcomes of each Work Package are shown on Figure 4.6, with the responsible organization to the process, supplier and customer of information and materials for each package. Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA) was developed to identify, prevent and have actions plans ready for potential defects on the product, process and the system. FMEA are shown on section 4.4.4. FMEA will be part of the Process Design Engineering. Statistical Process Control (SPC) will be in place for critical production variables. SPC is a methodology for monitoring the process to identify special causes of variation and signaling the need to take corrective action, when it is appropriate. (Evans, 2008).Critical dimensions, parts positioning, material flow, and assembly process of new parts and components will be defined in other to determine when specifications are out of control and when relevant corrective actions are needed to keep the production within high quality standards. Figure 4.4 summarizes API, Inc Quality Control System. 52 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 53. Figure 4.4: Quality Control System (Machinery, 2010) Quality Control System.igx Material Yes Inspection IQC Material Certificate No SPC Control CONTINUOS IMPROVEMENT Efficienty Manufacture Improvement Training Proces Study Process Capability Process Yes Control Gage R&R IPQC FMEA Gage Plan Failure SPC Analysis No Candid Feedback 100% Yes Inspection OQC Inspection Record Check Packaging List No Check Packing and Shipping Customer Quality Service Feedback Feedback IQC: Internal Quality Control IPQC: In-Process Quality Control OQC= Operational Quality Control FMEA: Failure Mode and Effect Analysis SPC: Statistical Process Control 53 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 54. 4.4.2 Work Package Identification Figure 4.5 : Work Packages (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) WBS numbering is drawn from the WBS section 4.1.2. There are 4 main phases: Project Planning, Manufacturing, Procurement and Production/Operations. Each phase consist of Working Packages and activities/tasks. Each Working Package has a number of Tasks to complete. Each Task is correspondingly indentified according to the numbering of the Working Package. 54 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 55. 4.4.3 Work Package Inputs, Process and Outputs 55 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600 Figure 4.6: Work Package Inputs, Process, Outputs (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)
  • 56. 4.4.4 Determining Possible Defects Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA) (McCoy, 2009) An FMEA can be described as a systemized group of activities intended to: 1) recognize and evaluate the potential failure of a product or a process and its effects, 2) identify actions which could eliminate or reduce the chance of the potential failure occurring 3) document the process. It is complementary to the design process of defining positively what a design must do to satisfy the customer. There are three basic cases for which FMEAs are generated, each with a different scope or focus. Case 1: New designs, new technology, or new process. The scope of the FMEA is the complete design, technology or process. Case 2: Modifications to existing design or process (hopefully there is an FMEA for the existing design or process). The scope of the FMEA should focus on the modification to design or process, possible interactions due to the modification, and field history. Case 3: Use of existing design in a new environment, location or application. The scope of the FMEA is the impact of the new environment or location on the existing design. The responsible engineer is in charge of ensuring that all recommended actions have been implemented and adequately addressed. The FMEA is a living document and should always reflect the latest relevant actions including those occurring after the start of production. 4.4.5 Prevention of Defects FMEA Implementation (McCoy, 2009) The responsible engineer has several means of assuring that recommended actions are implemented. They should include, but are not limited to the following: a) Reviewing designs, processes and drawings to ensure that recommended actions have been implemented. b) Confirming the incorporation of changes to design-, assembly- or manufacturing documentation. 56 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 57. c) Reviewing design and process FMEAs, special FMEA applications and control plans. The figure 4.7 illustrates the difference and the connection of System FMEA, Design FMEA and Process FMEA. The preferred application method during the Integrated Product Development and Launch Processes (PDLP) is flow-down, where the customer requirements cascade down from one FMEA level to the next. FMEA is used during the early concept phase, as well as the detailed phase, to assess the risk of not delivering a product to the customer with the intended functions. It is also a useful means to document the decision-making process, to identify potential key characteristics and to identify elements of an analysis and a test plan. The flow-up method is commonly used with the Engineering Change process. It is used to evaluate changes to existing or new applications for existing systems, products, options, parts or processes, as well as a structured problem-solving tool. For Engineering Changes the local Engineering Manager may decide whether a System FMEA is needed or if the Severity can be determined by the FMEA team. The Severity rating should reflect the severity of the highest known FMEA level Failure Effect (i.e. the Failure effect in the Process FMEA should be the same words as the Failure Effect of the System FMEA). Figure 4.7: FMEA Development Process (McCoy, 2009) 57 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 58. Statistical Process Control Statistical Process Control is a methodology for monitoring the process to identify special causes of variation and signaling the need to take corrective action , when it is appropriate. (Evans, 2008). The Key application of SPC is to use control charts for variables that are critical to the product and process. Some examples of variables to control fo the coil spring and wire forms are related to material and dimensional attributes. For instance the diameter of the wire form and tolerances within +/- 1% of the dimension will need to be considered when controlling product variables, assuming the automated equipment is very précise. Additional to the product dimensions, the calibration of new equipment will also need to be under control for specific variables related to the machine operation. 4.4.6 Indentification of Defects Design FMEA and its Process counterpart (McCoy, 2009) The Design FMEA is a living document and should be initiated before or at design concept finalization, be continually updated as changes occur or additional information is obtained throughout the phases of product development, and be fundamentally completed before the production drawings are released for tooling. Considering that manufacturing /assembly needs have been incorporated, the Design FMEA addresses the design intent and assumes the design will be manufactured and assembled to this intent. Potential failure modes and/or causes or mechanisms which can occur during the manufacturing or assembly process might be identified in the Design FMEA, but their identification, effect and control are covered by the Process FMEA. The Design FMEA does not rely on process controls to overcome potential weaknesses in the design, but it does take technical/physical limits of a manufacturing and assembly process into consideration, e.g.:  Necessary mould drafts.  Limited surface finish.  Assembling space and access for tooling.  Limited harden-ability of steels.  Tolerances, process capability, process performance. The design FMEA can also take into consideration the technical/physical limits of product maintenance (service) and recycling, for example: 58 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 59. Tool access  Diagnostic capability  Material classification symbols (for recycling) Statistical Process Control Charts SPC control charts have three basic applications: 1.Establish the state of the statistical control ; 2. To monitor the process and to signal when the process goes out of control; 3. To determine the process capability. Figure 4.8 show the steps required to develop and use control charts. Figure 4.9 shows the interpretation of points out of control for SPC. Figure 4.5: Control Chart Process (Evans, 2008) 1. Preparation 2. Data Collection 3.Determination of trial control limits •Choose the •Record the data •Draw the center Variable or •Calculate relevant line attribute to be statistics: •Compute the measure averages, ranges, lower and upper •Determine the proportions, and control limits Basis, size and so on frequency to be •Plot the statistics measure on the chart •Setup the control chart 4.Analysis and 5.Use as a problem 6.Determination of Interpretation solving tool process capability •Investigate the •Continue data •Use control chart Chart for Lack of collection and data Control plotting •Constantly •Eliminate out of •identify out-of update and control points control situations review process •Recompute and corrective capability control limits if actions necessary 59 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 60. Figure 4.6: Control Points InterpretationInvalid source specified. (Machinery, 2010) 60 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 61. 5 Project Cost Estimate 5.1 Project Cost 5.1.1 Total Project Cost Project Cost will be distributed in Labor, Material, Trips, General Administration and Contingency, based on our Risk Assessment. Table 5.1 shows Actual Cost at week 14. The Baseline Budget and the Forecasted Budget (week 14 + 29 weeks ). Final Project cost is to remain the same after the unexpected event, contingency plan cost is to be absorbed by the contingency budget. Table 5.1: Project Cost Status (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) 61 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 62. 5.1.2 Breakdown of Project Costs The WBS shown on figure 5.1 breakdowns the cost in different packages. Estimates for each cost package are shown in black figures as the original Baseline Cost Budget; in red as the new Modified Baseline Budget and in white as the Actual Cost. There is a new work package added to the Procurement Package: Engineering Tooling/Specs Revision is required for new Vendor B’s engineering inspection and specifications revision. Materials - the highest account - will be broken down in 4 payments: 25 % deposit, 25 % at Shipping, 25% at receives, 25% after Installation and Validation once the new contract is signed. 8 Figure 5.1: WBS/ Cost Package Breakdown (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) Springs Assembly Line Automation Project $2,557.608.3 $2,557,608.3 $113,157 Contingency General Admi Project (7) $215,127.0 $109,223.0 $2,253,258.3 $131,191.6 $109,223.0 $2,337,193.7 $0 $35,561.0 $77,596.25 Project Manufacturing Procurement Production/Operations Planning $48,845.3 $1,353,065 $781,228.0 $1,320.0 $48,845.3 $1,419,573.1 $798,655.2 $1,320.0 $43,290.3 $15,585.8 $1,320.0 Layout Installation Design Purchasing $19,273.0 $15,840.0 $8,580.0 $16,128.7 $8,580.0 $22,485.0 Preliminary Plan $8,580.0 $15,585.8 $1,320.0 $1,320.0 Tools/Equip Maintenance $1,320.0 Training Design $11,072.0 New Tool/Specs $10,032.0 Communication $11,072.0 Revision $10,295.4 Plan $11,072.0 $0 $0 $7,392 $0 Process Design Human $0 $10,120.0 Resources $10,120.0 $11,900.0 $10,120.0 $11,900.0 Tooling Buildout Development/ $4,840.0 Shipping MVB Training $4,840.0 $1,333,792.0 $738,396.0 $4,840.0 $1,389,696.1 $755,271.0 Manufacturing Validation Plan Finance Audit $14,233.3 $5,060.0 $14,233.3 $5,060.0 $8,678.3 8 The difference of $17,400 in Project Actual Cost (in White) corresponds to Salary of Project Manager up to week 14 62 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 63. 5.1.3 Progress Payments Monthly payments have been adjusted to the modified payment plan. Table 5.2 shows both the baseline and modified baseline payment plans. Figures 5.3 shows the deferred payments from the month of August,2010. Vendor change will defer the initial deposit payment for the Wire Gauge and Wire Forming equipment. Later installment payments, as agreed in the contract will have one month lag time for the first two payments, all corresponding to the action plan explained in section 6. Table 5.2: Monthly Payments (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) Figure 5.2: Progress Payments Chart- Modified (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) 63 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 64. 5.1.4 Monthly Payment Distribution Table 5.3 shows the payments distribution with the baseline modified. Figure 5.3 shows a graphical representation of the current payment distribution per month according to the modified budget. Notice how the contingency budget will be allocated in the months of August and November to accommodate for Vendor Change action plan. Details of weekly payments for baseline and modified baseline are shown on Appendix C. Table 5.3: Monthly Payments Allocations- Modified (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) Figure 5.3: Monthly Payments Allocation Chart (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) 64 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 65. 5.1.5 Earned Value Control The Cost will be controlled with Earned Value Methodology. The Cost Performance Index (CPI) will float between 0.90 and 1.05. Any deviation from these values needs to call for an Action Plan and Project Cost Revision. Figure 5.4 shows the baseline EVA Monthly Plan. Modified Baseline EVA Model was forecasted for the remaining of the project, after the unexpected event with the supplier selection. Figure 5.5 shows the new values for the EVA control curve. Nnotice displacement of the payments for equipment between the Baseline lines and Modified Plans. Weekly Plan Values for the modified EVA model are shown on Appendix F. Figure 5.4: EVA Control Plan- Baseline (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) Figure 5.5: EVA Control Plan - Modified (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) 65 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 66. 5.1.6 Control Performance Index (CPI) & Schedule Performance Index (SPI) Project was under control with SPI and CPI at 1.0 until the unexpected event happened. Due to the unexpected event, there will be a Supplier Selection delay and metrics are affected; SPI index went down to 0.91; CPI index remains at 0.99. Both Indicators are in good standing after a revision plan is put in place to keep the project on track. The calculations for the CPI and SPI as of week 14 are done considering the undergoing action plan for new Wire Gauge Checkers and Wire Forming equipment with Vendor B contract. Figure 5.6 shows the Actual Cost (AC) and Earned Value (EV), which are the same values except for the Cost Variance on week 14 ( CV14=EV14-AC14 = -$739). Cost Performance Index (CPI) (PMI, 2010) CPI14 = EV14 / AC14 = $112,400 / $113,157 = 0.99 Schedule Performance Index (SPI) (PMI, 2010) SPI14v= EV14/PV14 = $112,400 / $122,259 = 0.91 Figure 5.6: Earned Value Analysis (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) 66 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 67. 5.1.7 Estimate at Completion (EAC) and Variance at Completion (VAC) Estimate at Completion (EAC) is calculated based on the performance of the project thus far. Although the Total Budget at Completion (BAC) is pretty much the same as the original baseline budget ($2,577,608), the EAC will be our potential completion cost, for statistical purposes. The VAC is not even detectable as seen on Figure 5.7. This is considering all the Action Plan Cost was absorbed by the Contingency Budget. Estimate at Completion (EAC) (PMI, 2010) EAC = AC + [(BAC-EV)/CPI] = $117,091 + [($2,577,608 – $116,352)/0.99)] = $2,603,208 Variance at Completion (VAC) (PMI, 2010) VAC = BAC – EAC = $2,577,608 – $2,603,208 = $ (25,600) Figure 5.7: Estimate at Completion (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) 67 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 68. 5.2 Customer-Provide Resources The main customer is the Department of Production, including the support departments of Quality and Engineering. The following list of resources is needed in place in order to operate the new equipment, installation and validation process. Table 5.4: Customer Resources (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) Production Floor Labor Systems Lab Testing Office  Electrical Outlet  Current  SAP-ERP System  Materials Testing  Conference 110V/240V Production in Place Equipment Rooms  Water Outlets Operators  Andon System  Dimensional  Training  Air Outlets  New hires for for Production Room Rooms  Epoxy Paint Automated Takt Time  MagnaFlux  Cardstock  Lights Equipment monitoring Testing  Printers  Electric Fans/VAC  Regular Quality  MS Project Equipment  Ink/Toner  Forklift – Inspection  MS Office  Durability  PC Capacity of  AutoCAD Testing 10,000 lbs loader  IGrafx Equipment min  PRTS  Floor Space  Simulation Room 68 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 69. 5.3 Terms and Conditions This agreement is made between Automotive Parts, Inc (API) and the Client/Vendor or Vendor specified in the project proposal. The purpose of the agreement is:  To ensure that both parties know their roles, rights and responsibilities  To ensure that the project is successfully completed to the satisfaction of both parties.  Ensure the Procurement and Installation of new Equipment, Software and hardware is completed in a satisfactory manner  Terms and Conditions to be included in the Procurement Contract Agreement with Vendors Both parties are expected to perform their duties conscientiously and in a professional manner. The services, fees, and other non-standard conditions are specified in the project proposal and Request for Quotation documents. The parties agree: 1. Basis of Documentation The Client/Vendor will provide API with a copy of the software and functional instructions at the start of the project. The documentation will be based on this. Changes to the software will incur additional costs. 2. Access to Information a. API requires access to one subject matter expert (SME) who can answer questions in a timely manner. The SME is specified in the project proposal. b. API will work with other members of the Client/Vendor’s/Supplier team as suggested by the SME, but ultimate responsibility for the accuracy of information given to API lies with the SME. 3. Provision of Software /hardware a. API warrants to Client/Vendor that any software that API owns and uses for the preparation of the documentation will be a legal copy. API will notify the Client/Vendor/Vendor in regards to any breach of this warranty. b. If the Client/Vendor/Supplier provides any software for API to use, then Client/Vendor/Vendor warrants that software will be a legal copy. The Client/Vendor/Vendor will notify API in respect of any breach of this warranty. 4. Provision of Equipment 69 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 70. a. API will provide its own general purpose computing and office equipment required for the production of the documentation, installation and setup of new equipment as express in the Customer Provided Resources of the Project Proposal. b. If specialized equipment is required, then API may require that this be provided by the Client/Vendor/Vendor for the duration of the project. 5. Approval of Deliverable Items To ensure the documentation conforms to the Client/Vendor’s/Vendor’s expectations and that the documentation is accurate, the Client/Vendor/Vendor is required at various stages of the documentation life cycle to formally approve the deliverable items that are produced (these are specified in the project proposal). a. API will provide a draft of the item to be approved. b. The Client/Vendor/Vendor will evaluate the draft in a timely manner and will provide API with a list of required changes. c. API will make the modifications that the Client/Vendor/Vendor requires (unless this compromises the usability or general quality of the documentation or assembly process) and will provide the Client/Vendor/Version with this new version. d. Following any modifications, the Client/Vendor/Vendor will do one of the following: i. Formally approve the deliverable item in which case it passes to the next stage. Approval can be either on paper or by email. ii. Ask for a further re-working, which will be at the Client/Vendor’s/Vendor’s expense (unless any necessary re-working is due to API’s error). 6. Errors and Omissions The Client/Vendor/Vendor must carefully check all completed documentation. While API takes utmost care in the preparation of documentation, API does not accept liability for errors or omissions. Payment of the final invoice indicates that the Client/Vendor has confirmed the accuracy of the documentation. 7. Additional Fees a. In addition to the Fees specified in the project proposal, the Client/Vendor /Vendor will pay API at the agreed rate for: i. Additional work required by the Client/Vendor/Vendor which is outside the scope of the documentation as defined in the project proposal. ii. Changes to the documentation which is required as a result of changes to the software functionality or structure of new equipment. iii. Changes to documentation at the request of the Client/Vendor/Vendor after the Client/Vendor/Vendor has approved a deliverable item (see Approval of Deliverable Items). 70 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 71. b. There are no fees for normal office consumables, phone calls, printing of drafts and other small items. 8. Timely Disclosure a. If API believes that the documentation cannot be finished on time, API will inform the Client/Vendor as soon as is reasonably practical. b. If the Client/Vendor is in any way unsatisfied with the progress or quality of API’s work, or if the software, hardware changes, the Client/Vendor will inform API as soon as is reasonably practical. 9. Early Termination a. Either party may terminate the contract at any time if the other party fails to meet its obligations specified in these terms and conditions. In such case, prior to termination, the innocent party will inform the other party in writing that it is not meeting the agreed obligations and that if this is not rectified within five working days, the innocent party will terminate the agreement. b. If the Client/Vendor is the innocent party, then following this notice, API will rectify the matter without expense to the Client/Vendor. c. If API is the innocent party, then following this notice, API will not spend time on the project. If the matter is rectified, and API continues to work on the project, API will not be liable for any delays to the provision of the documentation. d. If termination proceeds i. Full payment must be made immediately for any invoices already submitted. ii. Any other work done (excepting that carried out under clause b), whether or not this is complete, must also be paid for. API will charge at the standard rate, as specified in the project proposal. API will invoice the Client/Vendor after notification of termination, and this must be paid immediately. 10. Third Party Rights These terms and conditions apply between API and the Client/Vendor. No third party as any rights under the Contract (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999. 11. Confidentiality All information supplied by either party to the other will be treated in strictest confidence. 12. Copyright 71 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 72. a. On final payment, copyright of the documentation that relates solely to the Client/Vendor’s is automatically transferred to API. Prior to this, Client/Vendor retains copyright. b. Once copyright is transferred, the Client/Vendor is entitled to change the documentation, provided that the changed documentation is not attributed to API. c. API retains copyright of all documentation that relates to publicly obtainable products or information that resides in the public domain. 13. Intellectual Property a. Any discoveries, inventions or other intellectual property that relate solely to the product will be the property of the Client/Vendor. b. Any other intellectual property will reside with API. 14. Law This agreement is governed by the laws of New York State. 15. Circumstances beyond Control Neither the Client/Vendor nor API shall be held responsible for circumstances beyond their reasonable control. 72 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 73. 6 Unexpected Event 6.1 Problem 6.1.1 General Description The Change Request form below describes the OEM Vendor Change problem. Automotive Parts, Inc Change Request Form Change Request: CR#001-2010 Page 1 of 2 Title: Wire Gauge Checkers/Wire Formers Supplier Selection Delay - Vendor OEM Change Request Project Title Task No. 1.3.3.1.4 Revision No. 1 Date issued: 08.02.2010 Automation Wire Supplier Selection Form/Spring Assembly Line Description of change: Need to change Equipment OEM vendor for Wire Gauge Checkers/Wire Formers. Initial selected supplier is in a financial crisis and will declare bankruptcy. Reason for Change: Selected Supplier, Electro Measure, is going through financial struggles and will declare bankruptcy, so it won’t be able to comply with the current contract and delivery of new equipment. The supplier is currently having difficulties paying for materials, payroll and other overheads. Electro Measure has terminated a lot of its staff and is very slow in making payments to their parts vendors. It has become difficult for them to even pay their electricity and telephone bills. This situation has put the project completion, equipment installation and service at risk. Documentation attached: Automotive Part Inc, Part 3 – Case Study Originated by: Hector A. Rodriguez Date: 08.02.2010 Requested logged by: Owen French - CEO Date: 08.01.2010 Cost Implications: $84,000 Schedule Implications: Changes in task activities, additional overtime work. No changes of final project delivery date. Implications of Performance of Deliverable(s): SPI = 0.91 CPI= 0.99 for week 14 Other Implications (risks & issues): If we stay with current vendor we could have service and installation difficulties even if the equipment is received. Due to the instability of the company, installation and service may not be available. Original supplier might be bought by new company in 2 months, or will cease operations within the next month. With the new supplier, shipping of new equipment and installation will take longer than previous supplier. Robotics and computer equipment will continue their regular fabrication and shipping schedules and are not affected by this situation. Proposed plan for implementation: Select new vendor, meet with new vendor to review engineering specs and drawings, designs. Look into new schedule for supplier selection, Shipping, installation and training. MVB to remain the same. A Decision Tree Analysis is recommended to find the best and least costly alternative. Implications Evaluated by: Date: Recommendation: Approve work and contract with Vendor B for Wire Gauge Checkers and Wire Forming equipment. Recommended by: Bob Jonson Date: Documentation attached: Approved by : French Owen Date: Approved by: Dike Ives Date: 08.16.2010 08.16.2010 73 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 74. 6.1.2 Current Status API,Inc Project Status Report Sourcing/Procurement Review Contract Sign-off August 16, 2010 Project Name: Automation Wire Form/Spring Assembly Line Department: PMO Focus Area: Sourcing/ Procurement Review Stage Gate Valve: Contract Sign-off Product/Process: Wire Gauge Checking, Wire Forming of Springs and Wire Forms Prepared By: Document Owner(s) Project/Organization Role Bob Jonson Project Manager Hector Rodriguez Project Manager Lydia Ross Project Manager Project Status Report Summary The Project Status Report is a document that Project Managers may use as a means of formal regular reporting on the status of a project to key project stakeholders, including the Steering Committee, Project Sponsor, and Senior Manager. Project Status summary details are shown below, focusing on milestones, deliverables and budget/cost variances for the Reporting Period : Sourcing/Procurement Review 74 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 75. Project Name: Automation Springs/Wire Forms Assembly Line Prepared By: Date: Reporting Period: Hector A Rodriguez 08.16.2010 Sourcing/Procurement Review Week 14 Project Overall Status: Project finished the project planning, design engineering/documentation phases. The Preliminary Plan, Program Initiation Review, Manufacturing Engineering Review, and Verify Data Release Review as all were approved with success. This will be the evaluation of the Sourcing/Procurement Review or Contract Sign-off Project Schedule and Budget are right on track ; SPI= 0.95 and CPI= 0.99 Sourcing/Procurement Review Validates the task for procuring new equipment and materials. Deliverables for Sourcing/Procurement Review:  RFQ  Bidding Quotations  Negotiation Rounds  Supplier Selection  Purchase Orders Budget Report Total Budget at Completion (BAC) is not affected, the project budget remains at $2,577,608. The action plan cost - $83,935 - will be absorbed by the Contingency Budget, this will be the cost variance for the implementation of this Supplier Selection Contingency Plan. Given the CPI=0.99 performance at the moment, we are expecting an Estimate at Completion (EAC) of $2,603,208, about $25,600 higher than the BAC. 75 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 76. Project Risk Management Status Human Resource Placement Risk is under control, the proposal for Placement of labor force was accepted on the Verify Data Release Review. OEM Vendor for Wire Gauge Checkers/Wire Formers is declaring bankruptcy and is putting the Shipping, installation and validation of the new assembly line on risk. Purchase orders have not been released yet, hence Shipping has not been activated either. Once Risk update is necessary in the Risk Matrix: Supplier Selection has move to be a top risk in the current status with a score of 3.75 over 5.0. Risk Risk Risk and Description Chance Impact Risk Score Change from Last Review Supplier Selection – Change 75% 5 3.75  New vendor will require more time and of OEM Vendor support for fabrication and development of equipment  New Vendor will require 5% additional cost on the Pricing of Equipment  Both Equipments Wire Gauge Checker / Wire Formers have to be procured together because they are produced consecutively in sequence  Review Vendor B financials in detail  Ensure Turnkey Installation and Training Project Issue Management Status Project Target Due Issue Issue and Description Impact Date Status Issue Resolution 1. Delay on Vendor High 09/01/2010 Open  Start revision of negotiations and contract Selection agreement with backup vendor B- Prepare  Selected Vendor is in purchase order to immediate start of financial struggle and equipment fabrication with vendor B. threatening to stop Implement other equipment fabrication fabrication and delivery and Shipping as modified plan. of Wire Gauge  Vendor B for Wire Gauge Checker and Checkers Equipment Wire Formers should be the same to avoid system and setups delays and should be  Change Request Reviewed by Engineering Department CR001.2010 for New  Plan for overtime for Maintenance OEM Vendor Selection Engineering for Equipment Displacement. 76 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 77. 2. New Specialized Market Medium 3 Months Open  Prepare a preliminary proposal for new Penetration after project specialized products. See section 7.0  CEO requested to completion  A preliminary expansion plan will be prepare the initial presented with the new automated planning for equipment and future market expansion projects for penetrations in other industries and value a more specialized added products. product with new  automated equipment  Change Request CR002.2010 for Project Expansion has been issued Project Budget Variance The Project Budget Variance in Table 6.1 shows the difference between the baseline Budget at Completion and the new modified Budget at Completion. Justifications for variances are explained according to the action plans for new Supplier Selection. 77 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 78. Table 6.1: Budget at Completion Breakdown (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) Budget Budget Budget Variance Budget Item BAC Modified BAC Baseline Explanation 1.0 PROJECT SPRINGS $2,577,608 $2,577,608 $0.00 1.1 General Administration $109,223.00 $109,223.00 $0.00 ($83,935.32) 1.2 Contingency Budget $131,191.68 $215,127.00 Procurement Action Plan 1.3 PROJECT $2,337,193.70 $2,253,258.3 ($83,935.32) 1.3.1 PROJECT PLANNING $1,320.00 $1,320.00 $0.00 1.3.1.1 PRELIMINARY PLAN $1,320.00 $1,320.00 $0.00 1.3.1.2 COMMUNICATION $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 1.3.2 MANUFACTURING $48,845.38 $48,845.38 $0.00 1.3.2.1 LAYOUT $8,580.00 $8,580.00 $0.00 1.3.2.2 TOOLS EQUIPMENT SPECS $11,072.05 $11,072.05 $0.00 1.3.2.3 PROCESS $10,120.00 $10,120.00 $0.00 1.3.2.4 BUILDOUT $4,840.00 $4,840.00 $0.00 1.3.2.5 MANUFACTURING VALIDATION PLAN $14,233.33 $14,233.33 $0.00 1.3.3 PROCUREMENT $1,419,573.12 $1,353,065.0 ($66,508.12) ($3,212.00) 1.3.3.1 PURCHASING $22,485.00 $19,273.00 Buyer retake of negotiations and contract close out with new Vendor ($7,392.00) NEW TOOLS/ 1.3.3.2 $7,392.00 $0.00 Engineering Revision of New Vendor’s EQUIPMENT SPECS REVISION Specs $55,904.12 1.3.3.2 TOOLING DEVELOPMENT AND SHIPPING $1,389,696.12 $1,333,792.0 Additional Pay 5% for New Vendor Equipment Price 1.3.4 PRODUCTION/OPERATIONS $798,655.20 $781,228.00 $17,427.20 $288.75 1.3.4.1 INSTALLATION $16,128.75 $15,840.00 Overtime Maint. Eng $263.45 1.3.4.2 MAINTENANCE TRAINING $10,295.45 $10,032.00 Overtime Maint. Eng 1.3.4.3 HUMAN RESOURCES $11,900.00 $11,900.00 $0.00 $16,875.00 MANUFACTURING/OPERATIONS 1.3.4.4 $755,271.00 $738,396.00 Additional Pay 5% for New Vendor VALIDATION-TRAINING Equipment Price 1.3.4.5 FINANCE $5,060.00 $5,060.00 $0.00 78 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 79. 6.2 Alternative Solutions 6.2.1 Overview The Project status as of Week 14 shows that an action plan for Supplier Selection must be in place in order to set the project back on Schedule. The CPI and SPI index are well under control but require special action to avoid future stoppage of the Project. Vendor A has been going through financial difficulties and is soon to declare bankruptcy putting the fabrication and delivery of new automated equipment at risk. This section will explain possible alternatives and the decisions to consider for the remaining of the project. Three scenarios will be evaluated for its probability of happening and cost impact. A decision tree will be calculated for the expected cost and the lowest cost will drive to a more intelligent decision. 6.2.2 Continuing Contract In this case scenario API, Inc will remain and stay with the contract with Electro Measure, knowing there is a high risk the company will declare bankruptcy. After talking to the representative of Electro Measure they told us there is a 95% probability that the company will cease operations in the next month. If we decide to continue with Electro Measure and keep the purchase of new equipment as planned, we might have to make pay the deposit within the next month as agreed in the payment terms. The deposit will release the production order for the fabrication of the Wire Gauge Checkers and Wire Forming Equipment. If the Electro Measure ceases operations in the next month, we will be losing the payment deposit and additional contingency cost, our total cost will be $623,000. The Project could be delayed for approximately 2-4 months. There is a 5% chance Electro Measures receives some financial assistance and gets back on its operations, keeping the business open, hence the additional cost will refer only to delay in supplier selection and contingency plan of $84,000. 6.2.3 Contract Modification In conversations with the Directors and Owners of Electro Measure, it was stated there is a possibility that a new company will absorb the debt and buy Electro Measure to make it more efficient and operative. They won’t know of this sale/buy decision until the next 2 months from week 14 of the project. If the company gets bought there is a 20% probability to continue with the project, activating the contingency plan for an additional cost of $84,000. The contingency will be used to revise contract terms and engineering development with the new company. However, we don’t know 79 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 80. if the new company will keep the current Product Line up, therefore exist a risk to training and the service of the equipment. If the company does not get bought within the next 2 month period, which is an 80% probability, Electro Measure will be forced to cease operations completely. We could be losing about $1,141,674 for the payments of equipment and labor according to contract and project Planned Value and will need an additional $84,000 for a recovery plan to finish the project. This will total about $1,224,674 in additional cost. 6.2.4 Pursuing another OEM The Third option is to change the Vendor. We already explained that as part of the risk assessment, a backup Vendor plan was considered. The purchasing team has already negotiated some pricing terms with Vendor B. This change will include an $84,000 contingency plan to activate the change of vendor and completion of project on time and budget. Considering the selection criteria and score results for Vendor B, we estimate a 95% change to continue the operations of the project and complete it on time and within the budget. There is still a 5% chance that Vendor B will enter into some kind of financial situation, although it has be in operations for over 40 years. This risk represents about $1,485,867, assuming this happens when all equipment is already installed. One major risk still exists in the project’s progress. Shipping of equipment over the Fall-Winter season can delay the project and activate an additional resource to complete the project on time. The full contingency of $215,127 will be used to add for overtime if necessary for the maintenance, training and manufacturing validation and to complete the project within 1-3 months of the propose deadline. At this point we are assuming Vendor B is in good standing with the project. 6.3 Proposed Action There are three possible alternatives. Alternative 1: keeping the current contract; Alternative 2: Modify the Contract and wait for Electro Measure to be sold; Alternative 3: Change the OEM Vendor. A decision tree will be use to estimate each alternative’s cost and potential lost. Outcomes calculations are shown on Figure 6.1, with the respective probability of the occurrence and the potential cost to the project at the moment of the occurrence. Expected Value for the alternative is then calculated, giving a more accurate estimation of potential lost for each alternative. Alternative 3 seems to be the least costly of the three options. Action Plan Activities for alternative 3 are developed in the next section. 80 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 81. Figure 6.1: Decision Tree - Supplier Change Cost Analysis (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) Bankrupt- Closing @ 1 Month $591,850 Alternative 1 95%, $623,000 + $596,050 Continue with Contract Stay Operative Recovery Package $4,200 5%, $84,000 Bankrupt - No Sale@ 2 Months $913,339 80% , $1,141,000 Supplier Change Alternative 2 Request Modify Contract $930,139 + Stay Operative-Sold $16,800 20% , $84,000 Going Bankrupt $74,293 5% 1,485,867 + Alternative 3 Change OEM Shipping Delays $139,832 $243,595 65%, $215,127 Stay Operative + 95% Shipping on Time $29,400 35%, $84,000 81 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 82. Action Plan Activities for Vendor Change Supplier Selection Delay – CR#001-2010 Purchasing Work Package Tasks 1.3.3.1.4 Sourcing/Procurement Purchasing will required 15 days to finish additional negotiations and contract Review agreements with Backup Vendor ( as explained in the Risk Assessment) Wire Gauge Checkers/Wire Formers equipment must be the same according to Engineering Requirements. New Vendor must provide both equipment to synchronize systems and setup. New Tools/ Equipment Specs Revision Package Tasks 1.3.3.2.1 / 1.3.3.2.2/1.3.3.2.3/1.3.3.2.4 Engineering will review new vendor’s specs to validate process and production system design. Additional hours will be planned in parallel to purchasing the Contract Revision with the new Vendor. Tooling Development Work Package Tasks 1.3.3.2.1 /1.3.3.2.2 Equipment Manufacturing will be split in: Manufacture of Wire Gauge Checker/Wire Formers (Vendor 1) and Manufacture of Robotics Welders (Vendor 2) and Other Computer hardware (Vendor 3) equipment which will keep same planned schedule. New time for Vendor 1 Manufacturing and Packing is 20 days. Tasks 1.3.3.2.3 / 1.3.3.2.4 / 1.3.3.2.5 Shipping will remain the same for Vendor 2 and Vendor 3 for Robots and Computers, respectively. Shipping for Wire Gauge/Wire Formers will be delayed after fabrication of new equipment. Shipping is to take 40 days as already planned. Installation Work Package Task 1.3.4.1.3 Installation and Setup of Wire Gauge/Wire Formers will need to be moved after arrival of equipment. Activity time remains within 10 days. Task 1.3.4.1.4 Displacement of Old Equipment for Robotics needs to be planned for overtime to reduce time by 5 days to avoid overloading the Maintenance Engineer Maintenance Installation Work Package Task 1.3.4.1.5/1.3.4.1.6 Training and Setup of Computers and Robotics will have same timing- 10 days - but planned after Displacement of old equipment Tasks 1.3.4.2.1 /1.3.4.2.2/1.3.4.2.3/1.3.4.2.4 Training and System Calibration of equipments will remain with same timing – 10 Days, but will move according to predeceasing activities. Human Resource and Manufacturing Validation Work Packages remain unchanged. 82 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 83. 7 Scope Expansion 7.1 Project Description The automation of API’s manufacture of coil springs, wire forms and sub-assemblies will increase the capacity of the company to produce additional products with new dimensions and specifications. The company’s capacity to produce its products at a faster rate of speed will almost double, leaving an opportunity to acquire new business and increase its product line. The CEO, Owen French has therefore expanded the automation project to include new business. The increased business will include specialty areas such as aircraft and aerospace companies, government contractors making ships, tanks and other military vehicles. The expansion project has been presented as an addition to the existing automation project in order to be ready for new business soon after the automation of the company has been completed. In order to achieve the goal of new customers for specialty items, the project management office along with marketing is developing strategies on breaking into the new market. To this end, project management along with the Engineering Department is researching the physical and material specifications required for the springs and wire forms used by companies in this market. In addition, project management has designed some short pilot production of the potential products that include prototypes of the new products. Since new raw materials are needed in the production of the specialty wire forms, new material suppliers are also being obtained. The project team and supporting organization formed for the expansion of the automation project is listed in figure 7.1 below. Table 7.1 summarizes some details about the Project Expansion for new product development. Table 7.1: Project Expansion Summary Client/Vendor name Aerospace/Defense Client/Vendor’s administrator PMO - Engineering New Product Development Program Project name for Wire Forms/ Springs Engagement duration 66 Weeks th Begin date August 30 , 2010 th End date January 16 , 2012 83 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 84. Figure 7.1: Program Expansion Team (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) Project Manager Dick Ives Project Planning Director Sales and Director of Director of Director of Director of Marketing Human Engineering Operations Supply Director Resource Marketing Manufact Product Materials Production Research Engineering Engineering Quality Manager Buyer(2) HR Specialist Manager Manager Specialist Manager Manager Product Materials Production Salesperson Facility Engineer Quality Engineer Engineer Engineer Supervisor Shift 2 Industrial Maintenance Testing Engineer Engineer Engineer Safety Systems Ergonomics Engineer Spervisor Manufacturing Subassembly Engineer Operators Process Key Engineer Project Team 84 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 85. 7.2 Initial Planning The initial planning of this project was to determine the exact wire forms to develop. In order to determine this information a marketing research specialist has been employed to review the current market and determine which wire forms are in the most demand. Also, research is being conducted with government agencies such as NASA and the Office of Defense to acquire government contracts to supply the specialty items. Marketing is also reviewing specialty items that the new equipment can produce but are not being supplied in order to gain a market share in these new industries. In terms of ensuring the company can produce the new products to customer specification, one of the items or indexes that will be tracked is the process capacity. Being in control of a manufacturing process using statistical process control (SPC) is not enough. An "in-control" process can produce bad or out-of-spec product. Manufacturing processes must meet or be able to achieve product specifications. Further, product specifications must be based on customers’ requirements. Process capability is the repeatability and consistency of a manufacturing process relative to the customer requirements in terms of specification limits of a product parameter. This measure is used to objectively measure the degree to which your process is or is not meeting the requirements. Capability indices have been developed to graphically portray that measure. Capability indices let you place the distribution of your process in relation to the product specification limits. Capability indices should be used to determine whether the process, given its natural variation, is capable of product with the given processes. Capability indices can be used to compare the product/process matches and identify the poorest match (lowest capability). The poorest matches then can be targeted on a priority basis for improvement. Figure 7.2 and Table 7.2 show the process needed to ensure the success of the new product development. The purpose of the process is "to produce a product quality plan which will support development of a product or service that will satisfy the customer." It does this by focusing on:  Up-front quality planning  Evaluating the output to determine if customers are satisfied & support continual improvement 85 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 86. Figure 7.2: Product Development Process (NPD-Solutions) A further indication of the process is to examine the process outputs by phase. This is shown in the table 7.2 below: Table 7.2: Phases and Deliverables (NPD-Solutions) 86 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 87. 7.3 Scope Marketing Research The scope of the original project to automate the coil spring, wire form and welding of sub- assembly specialty products has expanded to new product development of aerospace coil spring, wire forms and sub-assemblies as well as government contracts for ships, tanks and other military vehicles. In order to ensure the company has the ability to mass produce these type of forms, the sales and marketing organizations have been employed to get the dimensions and specifications of coil springs, wire forms and sub-assemblies as well as the design and material requirements to meet the customer’s needs. Table 7.3 describes some of the task to be undertaken during the marketing process for API to meet the needs of new customers. 9 Table 7.3: Marketing Research Analysis Worksheet ID Package / Tasks 1.0 Marketing Research Tactical Plan 1.1 Scope Definition Phase 1.1.1 Define research objectives 1.1.2 Define research requirements 1.1.3 Determine in-house resource or hire vendor 1.2 Vendor Selection Phase 1.2.1 Define vendor selection criteria 1.2.2 Develop vendor selection questionnaire 1.2.3 Develop Statement of Work 1.2.4 Evaluate proposal 1.2.5 Select vendor 1.3 Research Phase 1.3.1 Develop market research information needs questionnaire 1.3.2 Interview marketing group for market research needs 1.3.3 Document information needs 1.3.4 Identify information to be gathered in research 1.3.5 Identify source of information 1.3.6 Identify research method (primary or secondary) 1.3.7 Identify research participant 1.3.8 Identify research technique (focus group or survey) 1.3.9 Identify timing requirements and budget 1.3.10 Develop research plan 1.3.11 Develop research information gathering tool 1.3.12 Conduct research 1.3.13 Document research findings 1.3.14 Develop research report 1.3.15 Review report with marketing group 9 Microsoft Excel Template: Marketing Research Tactical Plan 87 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 88. The Marketing Research department will conduct research to determine the market's needs and how and who is currently servicing it to understand the marketing share of the new products and how to position the company to acquire a portion of the market. The marketing research will also allow the company to analyze the current market, gain a competitive advantage and establish a marketing plan. Some of the questions that will be answered by the sales and marketing department include the following: 1. What defined market is being targeted? 2. What specific companies are servicing this market? 3. Are they successful? 4. Are there other companies servicing this market with a similar product? 5. Are they successful? 6. What is their market share? 7. Is the market saturated or wide open? If so, why? 8. What is the size of the market? 9. Is it a growing market? 10. Is the industry stable, volatile, growing or trendy? 11. How can I reach this market? 12. How do API’s competitors reach the market? 13. What are the business models of the competitors? 14. What do customers expect from this type of product or service? 15. What core competencies must the product or service have? 16. What are customers willing to pay for this type of product or service? 17. What is my competitive advantage? One of the most important questions that needed to be answered was defining the market and making sure API could supply the targeted market with what they needed. Since API has been in the coil spring industry for some time, the company has background experience on producing the product. The area of uncertainty lies in the new product development and the ability of the automated equipment to correctly produce the new products in large quantities with low reject rates. In addition to the research, the marketing department will need to conduct a new product sales forecast to determine the financial impact to the company by going into the new market. 88 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 89. New Product Development - Program Management Three new products will be launched over the course of the next seventeen months. The first launch will be for a new coil springs for military tanks. The next launch will be wire forms for NASA aerospace equipment, and the last launch will be subassemblies for the military applications of the department of Defense. The launch of coil springs and wire forms will include the procurement of new raw materials. For the subassembly project a new tooling and equipment design, development and installation is required. Also, consignment parts for subassembly will be procured and produce in a specialized subassembly cell. A summary of the program scope terms is shown on table 7.4. Table 7.4: Program Scope Summary Wire Forms Aerospace Coil Spring Military Tanks Subassembly Defense  Market Research  Market Research  Market Research  Procurement of Raw Materials  Procurement of Raw  Procurement of consignment  Process Engineering Design Materials parts  New Product Specs and  Process Engineering Design  Tooling/Jigs Development Requirements  New Product Specs and  Equipment Development  Product Engineering Design Requirements  Process Engineering Design  Validation Engineering  Product Engineering Design  Product Engineering Design  Manufacturing Validation  Validation Engineering  Validation Engineering  Sales/Advertising  Manufacturing Validation  Manufacturing Validation  Sales/Advertising  Sales/Advertising 7.4 Schedule The Initial Schedule for the Product Development Program is divided into three product development projects: Project #1: Wire Forms Aerospace ; Project #2: Coil for Tanks Defense; Project #3: Subassemblies Defense. Table 7.5: Program Summary Schedule Project Completion date th 1. Wire Forms Aerospace June 8 , 2011 . 2.Coil for Tanks Defense st August 1 , 2011 th 3.Subassemblies Defense January 16 , 2012 89 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 90. Each project will be planned with some separation to have a production learning curve. Project #1 and Project #2 are very similar in schedule and cost, while Project #3 requires additional resources, time and cost since it will be a new production development, new equipment and tooling. Figure 7.3 shows the progress of each project through the Sales( yellow) , Engineering ( fuchsia) , Procurement ( green) , Validation ( aqua ) , Human Resources ( red) and Regular Production Packages. Detailed Schedules of each project are shown on Appendix I. Figure 7.3: Product Development Program Schedule (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) 90 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 91. 7.5 Budget 7.5.1 Schedule of Rates - Labor Labor cost is calculated for the Salary workers only. Production workers who will participate in projects #1 and #2 won’t be considered as part of the Project Budget, but of regular production overhead. Additional Production force is to be hired for Project #3. Table 7.6: Program Schedule of Rates (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) Wire Forms Coil for Tanks Subassemblies Aerospace Defense Defense Item description Qty Avg. Delivery Cost Delivery Cost Delivery Cost Rate schedule Baseline schedule Baseline schedule Baseline (Man - (Man - (Man - hours) hours) hours) Process Engineer 1 $33.00/h 257.3 $8,492.0 257.3 $8,492.0 293.3 $9,680.0 Manufacturing 1 $33.00/h 106.6 $3,520.0 264 $8,712.0 594.6 $19,624.0 Engineer Quality Engineer 1 $33.00/h 104.0 $3,432.0 173.33 $5,720.0 173.3 $5,720.0 Buyer 1 $33.00/h 318.8 $10,520.4 327.87 $10,819.6 327.8 $10,819.6 Buyer 2 1 $33.00/h 238.6 $7,876.0 Supplier 1 $0.00/h 344.0 $0.0 344 $0.0 1220 $0.0 Production Manager 1 $35.00/h 104.0 $3,640.0 173.33 $6,066.6 173.3 $6,066.6 Testing Engineer 1 $33.00/h 211.0 $6,963.0 210 $6,930.0 211 $6,963.0 Marketing Specialist 1 $33.00/h 668.0 $22,044.0 333.33 $11,000.0 333.3 $11,000.0 Salesperson 1 $33.00/h 480.0 $15,840.0 480 $15,840.0 480 $15,840.0 Product Engineer 1 $33.00/h 362.6 $11,968.0 432 $14,256.0 501.3 $16,544.0 HR Specialist 1 $28.00/h 320.0 $8,960 Maintenance Engineer 1 $33.00/h 306.6 $10,120.0 Subassembly 5 $15.86/h 866.85 $13,747.4 Operators Totals 18 2,956.3 $86,419.4 2,995.16 $87,836.2 6,039.9 $142,960.6 91 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 92. 7.5.2 Equipment and Materials As part of the equipment and materials we are procuring new wire materials for new product development, consignment parts for subassembly testing; additional marketing/advertising and sales development materials. Table 7.7: Program Equipment and Material Cost (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) Wire Forms Coil Tanks Subassemblies Aerospace Defense Defense Cost Baseline Cost Baseline Cost Baseline Item description Quantity Rate/unit Name Registration $500.0 Wire Materials for 160 $5/ft $800.0 $800.0 $800.0 Prototype Wire Materials for 2,500 $5/ft $12,500.0 $12,500.0 Manufacturing Validation Build Marketing Materials 5,500.0 Website Update 2,500.0 Consignment Parts 35,000.0 ( Inventory for Prototype and Validation) Tooling Development 55,000.0 New Equipment 55,000.0 Development (air guns, torque guns, etc) Totals $21,800.0 $13,300.0 $145,800.0 7.5.3 General Administration, Contingency, Others Contingency budget accounts will need a deeper risk assessment review . General Administration Cost include overhead of the operation allocated to the expansion project only. Table 7.8: Program General Admin, Contingency, Other Costs (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) Wire Forms Coil Tanks Subassemblies Aerospace Defense Defense Item Description Cost Cost Cost Baseline Baseline Baseline General Administration $11,321.9 10,613.6 27,175.3 Trips $5,000.0 5,000.0 6,500 Contingency $33,407.0 $37,779.7 $42,587 Totals $49,728.9 $53,393.3 $76,262.3 92 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 93. 7.5.4 Summary of Total Cost Total cost for New Product Development Projects are shown in table 7.6. The three projects for Aerospace, Defense and Subassemblies will total $654,793.3. The projects will require 10,804 hours for 10 Engineers and 2 Buyers. Table 7.9: Total Program Cost (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) 93 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 94. Figure 7. 4 shows the cost distribution for each project and the total of the new product development program. Project# 1 and Project #2: Wire Forms for Aerospace and Defense, has a very similar cost structure for labor and materials. Project 3: Subassemblies for Defense is the most costly and requires additional investment in materials, mainly production equipment and tooling. For this reason Project # 3, will be delivered later on the Program Plan, given it will be a new production operation for API, Inc. Figure 7.4: Program Cost Distribution (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) 94 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 95. 7.5.5 WBS/ Cost Breakdown WBS Chart Pro serves to show ( on figures 7.5, 7.6 and 7.7 ) the WBS and Cost Breakdown for each of the project’s work packages. Figure 7.5 : WBS/Cost Project # 1 : Wire Forms Aerospace (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) 95 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 96. Figure 7.6: WBS/Cost Project #2 : Coil for Tank Defense (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) 96 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 97. Figure 7.7: WBS/Cost Project #3: Subassemblies Defense (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) 97 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 98. 8 Appendixes 8.1 Appendix A – Risk Assessment Matrix Risk Assessment Matrix 98 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 99. 99 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 100. 8.2 Appendix B – Schedule of Rates Detailed Schedule of Rates RESOURCE NAME QUANTITY HOURS Overtime Total hours STANDARD RATE Overtime Rate LABOR COST Professional Staff Project Manager 1 1720 - 1720 $40.00 $50.00 $ 68,800.00 Finance Auditor 1 193.33 - 193.33 $33.00 $41.25 $ 6,379.89 Facility Engineer 1 160 80.00 240 $33.00 $41.25 $ 8,580.00 Industrial Engineer 1 153.33 - 153.33 $33.00 $41.25 $ 5,059.89 Process Engineer 1 255.07 54.00 309.07 $33.00 $41.25 $ 10,644.81 Manufacturing Engineer 1 226.67 - 226.67 $33.00 $41.25 $ 7,480.11 Quality Engineer 1 153.33 - 153.33 $33.00 $41.25 $ 5,059.89 Buyer 1 179.75 81.00 260.75 $33.00 $41.25 $ 9,273.00 Supplier 1 516 40.00 556 $0.00 $41.25 $ 1,650.00 Maintanance Engineer 1 472 - 472 $33.00 $41.25 $ 15,576.00 Production Manager 1 73.33 - 73.33 $35.00 $43.75 $ 2,566.55 HR Specialist 1 566.67 - 566.67 $28.00 $35.00 $ 15,866.76 Material Handling Engineer 1 50.87 27.00 77.87 $33.00 $41.25 $ 2,792.46 System Engineer 1 368.67 20.00 388.67 $33.00 $41.25 $ 12,991.11 Testing Engineer 1 168 - 168 $33.00 $41.25 $ 5,544.00 Production Supervisor 2 300 - 600 $28.00 $35.00 $ 16,800.00 Manufacturing Engineer 2 1 90.67 40 130.67 $33.00 $41.25 $ 4,642.11 Subtotal Professional Staff 18.00 6,289.69 $ 199,706.58 RESOURCE NAME QUANTITY HOURS Overtime Total hours STANDARD RATE Overtime Rate LABOR COST Operations Staff Guage Operator (1) 2 300 600 $ 13.46 $ 8,076.00 Wire Forming Operators (1) 5 300 1500 $ 15.86 $ 23,790.00 Wire Forming Operators (2) 5 300 1500 $ 17.45 $ 26,175.00 Welders Operators (1) 2 300 600 $ 16.82 $ 10,092.00 Welders Operators (2) 2 300 600 $ 18.50 $ 11,100.00 Subtotal Operations Staff 16.00 4,800.00 $ 79,233.00 100 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 101. RESOURCE NAME QUANTITY HOURS Overtime Total hours STANDARD RATE Overtime Rate LABOR COST Current Operation Checkers 8 300 2400 $ 12.00 $ 28,800.00 Inspector 3 300 900 $ 16.34 $ 14,706.00 Wire Forming Operators (1) 10 300 3000 $ 14.90 $ 44,700.00 Wire Forming Operators (2) 8 300 2400 $ 16.34 $ 39,216.00 Wire Forming Operator (3) 4 300 1200 $ 17.30 $ 20,760.00 Welding 1 5 300 1500 $ 16.34 $ 24,510.00 Welding 2 3 300 900 $ 17.78 $ 16,002.00 Welding 3 1 300 300 $ 18.75 $ 5,625.00 Subtotal Current Operation 42.00 12,600.00 $ 194,319.00 Labor Cost Total $473,258.58 Materials, Equipment, Administration Cost RESOURCE NAME QUANTITY HOURS Overtime Total hours STANDARD RATE Overtime Rate LABOR COST Equipment Cost 1 Computer Terminal 5 $ 2,000.00 $ 10,000.00 Wire Gauge Checkers 2 $ 150,000.00 $ 300,000.00 Wire Forming CNC 5 $ 210,000.00 $ 1,050,000.00 Welding Robotics 2 $ 205,000.00 $ 410,000.00 Subtotal Equipment Cost $ 1,770,000.00 RESOURCE NAME QUANTITY HOURS Overtime Total hours STANDARD RATE Overtime Rate LABOR COST Admin Cost Travel 1 $ 10,000.00 $ 10,000.00 Subtotal Travel $2,253,258.58 Contingency 1 $ 180,260.69 $ 215,127.00 Subtotal Contingency 1 $2,468,385.58 General Administration $ 111,324.00 FINAL TOTAL $2,579,709.58 101 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 102. 8.3 Appendix C – Weekly Payments Progress Detailed Weekly Payments Fixed - Materials Contingency WBS Activity Month Week Closing Date Labor Cost Cost Cost 1.3.1.1.1 PROJECT SCHEDULE 3 5/19/2010 9:20 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 1.3.1.1.2 WBS 3 5/19/2010 9:20 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 1.3.1.2.1 ORG. CHART/TEAM 4 5/25/2010 15:40 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 May 1.3.1.2.3 STAGE GATE PLAN 4 5/25/2010 15:40 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 1.3.1.1.3 PROJECT COST/EVA 4 5/26/2010 9:20 $0.00 $1,320.00 $0.00 1.3.1.1.4 RISK MATRIX 4 5/26/2010 9:20 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 1.3.1.2.2 RESPONSIBILITY MATRIX 5 6/1/2010 12:00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 1.3.1.4 PROGRAM INITIATION REVIEW 5 6/3/2010 8:00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 1.3.2.1.1 FACILITY LAYOUT DESIGN 7 6/16/2010 17:00 $0.00 $4,290.00 $1,120.00 June 1.3.2.2.1 AUTOMATION REQUIREMENT AND SPECS. DEVELOPMENT 8 6/25/2010 10:52 $0.00 $2,792.35 $60.85 1.3.2.6 MANUFACUTRING ENGINEERING REVIEW 9 6/28/2010 8:00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 1.3.2.1.2 CONSTRUCTION PLAN AND REQUIREMENTS 9 6/30/2010 17:00 $0.00 $4,290.00 $1,120.00 1.3.2.2.2 TOOLING DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT 10 7/5/2010 14:44 $0.00 $2,792.35 $60.85 1.3.2.2.4 MATERIAL HANDLING TOOLS/HANGERS DESIGN 11 7/14/2010 8:36 $0.00 $2,792.35 $60.85 1.3.2.2.3 COMPUTER HARWARE/NETWORK DESIGN July 11 7/14/2010 15:24 $0.00 $2,695.00 $93.33 1.3.2.5.2 HUMAN RESOURCE PLACEMENT PLAN 11 7/16/2010 9:20 $0.00 $6,533.33 $1,993.33 1.3.3.1.1 RFP 12 7/23/2010 9:16 $5,000.00 $7,792.35 $60.85 1.3.2.7 VERIFY DATA RELEASE REVIEW 14 8/2/2010 8:00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 1.3.3.1.2 BIDDING 14 8/2/2010 13:08 $0.00 $2,792.35 $60.85 1.3.2.4.1 INSTALLATION PLAN/ PRODUCTION PLAN 15 8/10/2010 9:04 $0.00 $4,840.00 $373.33 1.3.2.3.1 SOP's AND ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTION SHEETS 15 8/10/2010 16:44 $0.00 $5,060.00 $1,306.67 1.3.2.3.2 SIMULATION OF PRODUCTION 15 8/10/2010 16:44 $0.00 $5,060.00 $1,306.67 August 1.3.3.1.3 NEGOTIATIONS 15 8/11/2010 11:29 $0.00 $2,940.30 $690.20 1.3.3.3 SOURCING/PROCUREMENT REVIEW 16 8/15/2010 17:00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 1.3.3.1.4 SUPPLIER SELECTION 16 8/16/2010 10:09 $5,000.00 $5,748.00 $37.33 1.3.2.5.1 MANUFACTURING VALIDATION PLAN 17 8/24/2010 16:44 $0.00 $2,640.00 $1,120.00 1.3.3.2.1 EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURE-PACKING 18 8/31/2010 13:49 $442,500.00 $448,792.00 $1,941.33 1.3.2.5.3 QUALITY/ENGINEERING PRODUCT TESTING PLAN September 19 9/7/2010 9:04 $0.00 $5,060.00 $186.67 1.3.3.2.2 COMPUTER SHIPPING 24 10/11/2010 15:09 $5,000.00 $5,000.00 $1,000.00 1.3.3.2.3 EQUIPMENT WIRE GAUGE/WIRE FORMING SHIPPING October 26 10/26/2010 13:49 $675,000.00 $675,000.00 $3,000.00 1.3.4.1.1 DISPLACE OF OLD EQUIPMENT 26 10/29/2010 17:00 $0.00 $2,640.00 $1,120.00 1.3.4.1.2 INSTALLATION OF WIRING/COMPUTER 28 11/12/2010 17:00 $0.00 $2,640.00 $1,624.00 1.3.4.6 PRODUCTION/OPERATIONS DEVELOPMENT REVIEW 29 11/15/2010 8:00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 November 1.3.4.2.3 SYSTEM CALIBRATION AND SETUP WIRE FORMING 30 11/26/2010 12:00 $0.00 $2,508.00 $1,560.00 1.3.4.1.3 INSTALLATION/SETUP WIRE GAUGE/ WIRE FORMING 30 11/26/2010 17:00 $0.00 $2,640.00 $1,896.00 1.3.4.2.1 TRAINING ON WIRE GAUGE/WIRE FORMING EQUIPMENT 32 12/10/2010 12:00 $0.00 $2,508.00 $1,560.00 1.3.3.2.4 EQUIPMENT ROBOTICS SHIPPING December 33 12/21/2010 13:49 $205,000.00 $205,000.00 $3,000.00 1.3.4.1.4 DISPLACE OF OLD EQUIPMENT 33 12/24/2010 17:00 $0.00 $2,640.00 $1,120.00 1.3.4.3.1 LABOR HIRING/RECRUITING/PLACEMENT 35 1/4/2011 17:00 $0.00 $9,333.33 $5,373.33 1.3.4.3.2 PRODUCTION SCHEDULE PLAN 35 1/4/2011 17:00 $0.00 $2,566.67 $233.33 1.3.4.7 MANUFACTURING VALIDATION REVIEW 1 35 1/5/2011 17:00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 January 1.3.4.1.5 INSTALLATION OF WIRING/COMPUTER 35 1/7/2011 17:00 $0.00 $2,640.00 $1,120.00 1.3.4.2.4 SYTEM CALIBRATION AND SETUP ROBOTICS 37 1/21/2011 12:00 $0.00 $2,508.00 $1,560.00 1.3.4.1.6 INSTALLATION/SETUP EQUIPMENT ROBOTICS 37 1/21/2011 17:00 $0.00 $2,640.00 $2,120.00 1.3.4.2.2 TRAINING ON ROBOTICS EQUIPMENT 39 2/4/2011 12:00 $0.00 $2,508.00 $560.00 1.3.4.4.1.1 MVB1- TRANING SHIFT 1 39 2/4/2011 17:00 $340,000.00 $369,095.73 $24,179.47 1.3.4.4.1.2 MVB1-TRAINING SHIFT 2 39 2/4/2011 17:00 $0.00 $26,390.00 $21,890.00 1.3.4.4.1.3 ENGINEERING/QUALITY TESTING 1 39 2/4/2011 17:00 $0.00 $2,772.00 $1,008.00 February 1.3.4.8 MANUFACTURING VALIDATION REVIEW 2 39 2/4/2011 17:00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 1.3.4.4.3.1 PRODUCTION SHIFT 1 40 2/7/2011 14:20 $0.00 $65,124.80 $55,105.60 1.3.4.4.3.2 PRODUCTION SHIFT 2 40 2/7/2011 14:20 $0.00 $31,903.73 $26,995.47 1.3.4.4.3.3 PRODUCTION SHIFT 3 40 2/7/2011 14:20 $0.00 $15,244.67 $12,899.33 1.3.4.4.2.1 MVB2- TRAINING SHIFT 1 43 3/2/2011 15:40 $102,500.00 $123,762.27 $5,495.33 1.3.4.4.2.2 MVB2-TRAINING SHIFT 2 43 3/2/2011 15:40 $0.00 $19,285.00 $4,975.00 1.3.4.4.3.4 PRODUCTION SHIFT 1 43 3/2/2011 15:40 $0.00 $47,591.20 $12,524.00 1.3.4.4.3.5 PRODUCTION SHIFT 2 43 3/2/2011 15:40 $0.00 $23,314.27 $6,135.33 March 1.3.4.4.3.6 PRODUCTION SHIFT 3 43 3/2/2011 15:40 $0.00 $11,140.33 1.3.4.4.2.3 ENGINEERING/QUALITY TESTING 2 43 3/2/2011 17:00 $0.00 102 | P a g $2,931.67 $2,772.00 e $1,008.00 Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600 1.3.4.5.1 AUDITS OF FINANCIALS 43 3/2/2011 17:00 $0.00 $5,060.00 $1,540.00 1.3.4.9 SORP REVIEW 43 3/2/2011 17:00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 Totals $1,780,000.00 $2,184,458.38 $215,127.00
  • 103. 8.4 Appendix D – Value Stream Maps Current Process Mapping Automotive Parts VSM,Inc.igx Sales Information Supplier Information Forecast Customer Demand: Prod. Market Customer 3000 pieces per Day Demand Control (Takt Time 28.8 Prepare seconds) Production Information Schedule 30 minutes Materials Reception 5 minutes 5 minutes 1 minutes 5 minutes Materials 60 minutes Quality 20 minutes Production 2 minutes Quality 5 minutes Paint Quality 1 minutes Dept Dept Production Production Production Production Dept Dept Inspector Shop Dept Mtl Wire Gauge Pre-Assembled Wire Forming Hardening Visual MagnaFlux Coating of Visual Reception 8 Checking Ship Parts to VA Parts Packing Shipping Cold/Hot Coiling 3 Inspection Inspection Parts Inspection Value Add: 50 minutes Production by 9 22 Value Add: 30 minutes Value Add: 6 minutes Value Add: 5 minutes Value Add: 40 minutes Value Add: 5 minutes Value Add: 10 minutes Value Add: 10 minutes NVA = 20 minutes Diameter Value Add: 35 minutes Defect = 25% Value Add: 50 minutes NVA = 1 minutes NVA = 0 seconds NVA = 0 minutes NVA = 5 minutes NVA = 0 seconds NVA = 0 minutes NVA = 0 minutes NVA = 5 minutes Value Add: 5 minutes NVA = 15 minutes Defect = 15% Defect = 30% C/O = 20 mins. Defect = 1% Defect = 0% Defect = 0% C/O = 20 mins. NVA = 2 minutes C/O = 20 mins. Checkers Control Quality Paint Defect = 5% Operator Operator Welding Operator Select Samples Inspector Divide in Tempering Operator 8 Check Setup Cold and Materials Setup Value Add: 15 minutes 100% Painting Jig NVA = 5 minutes Hot Coiling 3 Welding Jigs Visually Value Add: 15 minutes 22 Value Add: 10 minutes 9 NVA = 5 minutes Checkers Value Add: 20 minutes NVA = 5 minutes NVA = 0 minutes Defect = 2% Value Add: 3 minutes NVA = 0 minutes Value Add: 20 minutes C/O = 20 mins. NVA = 5 minutes Defect = 15% C/O = 20 mins. Gauge Control Measuring Operator 8 Control Quality Welding Operator Setup Value Add: 15 minutes Operator Inspector Operator Dipping NVA = 5 minutes Forming Defect = 10% Welding VA Spraying 22 Jigs Check Grinding Parts Heating or Checkers Value Add: 15 minutes NVA = 5 minutes 3 100% 9 Deposition Value Add: 10 minutes Production Separete by C/O = 20 mins. Value Add: 10 minutes Value Add: 10 minutes NVA = 1 minutes MangaFlux NVA = 0 minutes NVA = 0 minutes Diameter Defect = 1% 3 Operator Value Add: 3 minutes NVA = 0 seconds Value Add: 15 minutes Coil, Bend, Control Defect = 10% Welding Control NVA = 5 minutes Form Operator Operator Defect = 15% 22 Operator Value Add: 10 minutes NVA = 5 minutes Shot Tearing Test Drying Defect = 25% Peening Inspectors 3 Value Add: 5 minutes NVA = 0 minutes Value Add: 15 minutes NVA = 0 minutes Value Add: 10 minutes NVA = 0 minutes Check for Defect = 2% Imperfections 3 Value Add: 5 minutes NVA = 5 minutes Defect = 15% 30 2 45  minutes 70 minutes 5 minutes 7 minutes 60 minutes 65 minutes 5 minutes 31 minutes 1 minutes 20 minutes 40 minutes  minutes 5 minutes  minutes 5 minutes 1 minutes Lead Time = 428 minutes 50 minutes 5 minutes 50 minutes 30 minutes 6 minutes 35 minutes 5 minutes 40 5 minutes 10 minutes 10 minutes VA / T = 246 minutes  minutes NVA = 48 minutes 20 mins. 20 mins. 20 mins. Inventory Time = 134 minutes Defect = 58% C/O = 60 mins. 103 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 104. Future Process Mapping Automotive Parts VSM_Future,Inc.igx Sales Information Supplier Information Forecast Prod.Control Customer Demand: Market 3000 pieces per Day Customer Prepare Demand Production (Takt Time 19.2 Schedule seconds) Information 5 minutes 2 minutes 5 minutes Materials 5 minutes Reception Materials Dept 1 minutes Quality 10 minutes Production Quality 5 minutes Quality Production Production 2 minutes 5 minutes Paint Shop 1 minutes Production Production Dept Dept Dept Inspector Dept Material Wire Gauge Ship Parts to Visual Pre-Assembled MagnaFlux Visual Wire Forming Hardening Packing Shipping VA Parts Coating of Parts Reception 2 Checking Production by Cold/Hot Coiling 3 Inspection Inspection Inspection 2 Value Add: 12 minutes Diameter 5 Value Add: 30 minutes Value Add: 6 minutes Value Add: 5 minutes Value Add: 40 minutes Value Add: 5 minutes Value Add: 10 minutes Value Add: 10 minutes Value Add: 12 minutes NVA = 0 minutes Value Add: 12 minutes NVA = 1 minutes NVA = 0 seconds NVA = 0 minutes NVA = 5 minutes NVA = 0 seconds NVA = 0 minutes NVA = 0 minutes Value Add: 5 minutes NVA = 0 minutes Defect = 95% Defect = 15% Defect = 30% C/O = 20 mins. Defect = 1% Defect = 0% Defect = 0% NVA = 2 minutes NVA = 1 minutes C/O = 3 mins. C/O = 2 mins. Defect = 5% C/O = 3 mins. Control Welding Paint Quality Wire Operator Operator Wire Forming Inspector Operator Operators Tempering Setup Operator Check Setup Painting Select Samples 3 Materials Robotic 100% Jig and Insert in Value Add: 10 minutes Welder Visually Wire Gauge in Insert Coil Form in NVA = 0 minutes 2 Value Add: 15 minutes Defect = 2% NVA = 5 minutes Automated Wire Former Value Add: 3 minutes Value Add: 5 minutes C/O = 20 mins. NVA = 0 minutes NVA = 0 minutes 5 Wire Gauge Defect = 15% C/O = 3 mins. Checkers Value Add: 1 minutes NVA = 0 minutes Control Control 2 Operator Welding Operator Value Add: 8 minutes Quality NVA = 0 minutes Operator Dipping C/O = 2 mins. Wire Forming 3 Grinding Inspector Control Spraying Operator Value Add: 10 minutes Check Welding Heating or NVA = 1 minutes 100% Process Deposition Wire Defect = 1% Calibrate CNC Production 2 Value Add: 10 minutes Operators Geometry MangaFlux Value Add: 7 minutes NVA = 0 minutes 5 Control NVA = 0 minutes Control Wire Value Add: 3 minutes Selection and Value Add: 5 minutes Operator NVA = 0 seconds Control Welding NVA = 1 minutes C/O = 3 mins. Defect = 10% 2 Sorting Shot Peening Operator Operator Value Add: 2 minutes Wire Forming 3 NVA = 0 minutes Value Add: 10 minutes Drying Tearing Test Operator NVA = 0 minutes Defect = 2% Value Add: 15 minutes Value Add: 5 minutes NVA = 0 minutes Produce Spring NVA = 0 minutes Wire Form in Automated Wire Former 5 Value Add: 2 minutes NVA = 0 minutes Defect = 98% 2 5   2  minutes 5 minutes 7 minutes minutes 13 minutes 5 minutes 31 minutes 1 minutes 10 minutes  minutes 5 minutes 45 minutes 5 minutes 1 minutes Lead Time = 197 minutes 12 minutes 5 minutes 12 minutes 30 minutes 6 minutes 12 minutes 5 minutes 40 minutes 5 minutes 10 minutes 10 minutes VA / T = 147 minutes 2 mins. 3 mins. 3 mins. 20 mins. NVA = 9 minutes Inventory Time = 41 minutes Defect = 97.2% C/O = 28 mins. 104 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 105. 8.5 Appendix E – Change Request Form Automotive Parts, Inc Change Request Form Change Request: Page of Title Project Title Task No. Revision No. 1 Date issued: Description of change: Reason for Change: Documentation attached Originated by Date: Date: Cost Implications : Schedule Implications : Implications of Performance of Deliverable(s) : Other Implications ( risks & issues ): Proposed plan for implementation Implications Evaluated by: Date: Recommendation Recommended by: Date: Documentation attached Approved by Date: Approved by: Date: 105 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 106. 8.6 Appendix F – Baseline Schedule 106 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 107. 8.7 Appendix G – Earned Value Analysis Week 14 107 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 108. 8.8 Appendix H – Contract Close Out Checklist API - CONTRACT CLOSE-OUT WORKSEET 1. PROJECT NAME 4. OTHER TRANSACTION (OT) NUMBER 2. NAME OF RECIPIENT 5. OT MODIFICATION NUMBER 3. RECIPIENT CLASS/TYPE 6. DATE OF PYSICAL COMPLETION ACTION ITEM COMPLETED 7. FINAL REPORT ACCEPTED Yes No Date 8. FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT Yes No Date Total Amount Obligated: $ Total Govt. Expenditures $ (Date of Final Payment ) Unliquidated Obligation $ Final Cost-Share Percentage: Recipient $ Govt. $ % % Negotiated % % Final Neg. Recipient: In-Kind Cash 108 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 109. Yes No Date Final expenditure audit determined necessary? Yes No Date Issues identified in final expenditure audit resolved If applicable? Yes No Date Modification to deobligate excess funds and/or reflect adjustments Notes: 9. FINAL PATENT DISCLOSURE (Invention Disclosure - Agreement Article ) Yes No Date All invention Proposal Disclosures Submitted to appropriate buying office Consortium as completed Invention Proposal Disclosure list. Notes: 109 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 110. ACTION ITEM COMPLETED 10. LICENSES ACQUIRED Yes No Date Notes: 11. DISPOSITION OF PROPERTY Yes No Date Obtain list of applicable equipment received from consortium and disposition of equipment completed. Notes: 110 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 111. OTHER TRANSACTION CLOSEOUT CECKLIST AGREEMENT NUMBER: THROUGHMODIFICATION NO: RECIPIENT: PERFORMANCE PERIOD: DATE COMPLETED 1. Final Invention Disclosure Report Completed/Cleared ______ 2. Final Patent/Royalty Report Completed/Cleared ______ 3. Final Technical Report Received/Accepted ______ 4. Final Business Report Received/Accepted ______ 5. All Milestones Satisfactorily Completed ______ 6. Verification of DTIC Reporting Completed ______ 7. Disposition of Classified Material ______ 8. GFE/Property Disposition Actions Completed ______ 9. Plant Clearance Completed ______ 10. Final Voucher/SF 269/270/272 Submitted ______ 11. Method for Verifying Costs Determined ______ 12. Cost Verification Process Completed ______ 13. Settlement of Cost Share/Contribution Issues ______ 14. Final Payment Completed ______ 15. Final Removal of Excess Funds ______ 16. Other Requirements Completed (Specify) ______ a. ______ b. ______ 17. Issuance of Completion Statement (DD 1594) ______ 111 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 112. 8.9 Appendix I 112 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 113. 113 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 114. 114 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 115. 9 Tables Table 1.1 Project Phases ................................................................................................................................ 6 Table 1.2: Product Development Program ..................................................................................................... 8 Table 2.1: Goals & Objectives (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) .............................................................................. 10 Table 2.2: Project Description ..................................................................................................................... 12 Table 2.3: Phases and Milestones (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ........................................................................ 12 Table 2.4: Schedule of Rates (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)................................................................................ 13 Table 2.5: Equipment Rates (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ................................................................................. 13 Table 2.6: Other Costs (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ......................................................................................... 14 Table 2.7 : Summary Cost Structure (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) .................................................................... 14 Table 2.8: Payment Schedule (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) .............................................................................. 15 Table 2.9: Assumptions (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ....................................................................................... 16 Table 2.10: Risk Matrix (Modified) (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ...................................................................... 22 Table 2.11: Weather/Shipping Action Plan (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) .......................................................... 24 Table 2.12: Overtime Proposal (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ............................................................................ 24 Table 2.13: Labor Conflicts Action Plan (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ............................................................... 25 Table 2.14: Replacement Proposal (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ..................................................................... 25 Table 2.15: Stage Gate Reviews (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ........................................................................... 28 Table 3.1: Corporate Responsibility Matrix (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ......................................................... 31 Table 3.2: Corporate Roles & Responsibilities (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ..................................................... 32 Table 3.3: Project Team Roles & Responsibilities (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ................................................ 36 Table 4.1: Procurement Process Procedures................................................................................................ 40 Table 4.2: Salary Labor Cost (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ................................................................................ 45 Table 4.3: Hourly Labor (Automated Line) Cost (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ................................................... 46 Table 4.4: Hourly (Current Line) Labor Cost (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ......................................................... 46 Table 4.5: Equipment Cost (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010)................................................................................... 47 Table 4.6: Contingency Cost and Others (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) .............................................................. 47 Table 4.7: Change Management Process (Services, 2010) ............................................................................ 48 Table 5.1: Project Cost Status (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) .............................................................................. 61 Table 5.2: Monthly Payments (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) .............................................................................. 63 Table 5.3: Monthly Payments Allocations- Modified (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ........................................... 64 Table 5.4: Customer Resources (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ........................................................................... 68 Table 6.1: Budget at Completion Breakdown (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ...................................................... 78 Table 7.1: Project Expansion Summary........................................................................................................ 83 Table 7.2: Phases and Deliverables (NPD-Solutions) .................................................................................... 86 Table 7.3: Marketing Research Analysis Worksheet .................................................................................... 87 Table 7.4: Program Scope Summary ............................................................................................................ 89 115 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 116. 10 Figures Figure 1.1: Process Performance Metrics (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ......................................................... 7 Figure 2.1: Stakeholders (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ................................................................................. 10 Figure 2.2: Benefits (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ........................................................................................ 11 Figure 2.3:Cost Distribution Chart (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) .................................................................. 14 Figure 2.4: SIPOC Current Process (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) .................................................................. 19 Figure 2.5: Process Performance Metrics (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ....................................................... 20 Figure 2.6: Baseline Modified Schedule (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) .......................................................... 21 Figure 2.7: Risk Summary Chart - Modified (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) .................................................... 23 Figure 2.8: Project Completion/Deliverables (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) .................................................. 27 Figure 2.9: Acceptance Test Chart (Motors, 2006) .................................................................................. 28 Figure 2.10: Acceptance Criteria/Sign-0ff Chart (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) .............................................. 29 Figure 3.1: Corporate Organizational Chart (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) .................................................... 30 Figure 3.2: WBS (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) .............................................................................................. 34 Figure 3.3: Project Organizational Structure (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ................................................... 35 Figure 3.4: Project Team Responsibility Matrix- Modified (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) .............................. 38 Figure 4.1: Procurement Process (Garrett, 2007) .................................................................................... 41 Figure 4.2: Monitoring Process (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ....................................................................... 44 Figure 4.3: Change Management Process (Nicholas & Steyn, 2008)........................................................ 51 Figure 4.4: Quality Control System (Machinery) ..................................................................................... 53 Figure 4.8: Control Chart Process (Evans, 2008) ...................................................................................... 59 Figure 4.9: Control Points InterpretationInvalid source specified. .......................................................... 60 Figure 5.1: WBS/ Cost Package Breakdown (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) .................................................... 62 Figure 5.2: Progress Payments Chart- Modified (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) .............................................. 63 Figure 5.3: Monthly Payments Allocation Chart (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ............................................. 64 Figure 5.4: EVA Control Plan- Baseline (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ........................................................... 65 Figure 5.5: EVA Control Plan - Modified (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ......................................................... 65 Figure 5.6: Earned Value Analysis (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ................................................................... 66 Figure 5.7: Estimate at Completion (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ................................................................ 67 Figure 6.1: Decision Tree - Supplier Change Cost Analysis (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) .............................. 81 Figure 7.1: Program Expansion Team (Ross & Rodriguez, 2010) ............................................................. 84 Figure 7.2: Product Development Process (NPD-Solutions) .................................................................... 86 116 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600
  • 117. 11 Works Cited 1. Danfoss, S. (2010). Sauer Danfoss Global Standard-GS-002-FMEA. Retrieved from http://www.sauer-danfoss.com/: http://www.sauer-danfoss.com/ 2. Evans, J. (2008). Managing for Quality and Performance Excellence. 3. Garrett, G. A. (2007). World Class Contracting, 4th Edition. 4. Machinery, L. (2010). Quality. Retrieved from http://bit.ly/d9Ix1R 5. Macinnes, R. L., & Macinnes, R. L. (2002). The Lean Memory Jogger. 6. McCoy, D. (2009). Sauer-Danfoss Global Standard GS-002 Failure Mode and Effect Analysis in Design . 7. Motors, G. (2006). General Motors Status Criteria for PQRR. 8. Nicholas, M. J., & Steyn, H. (2008). Project Management for Business, Engineering and Technology, 3rd Edition. 9. NPD-Solutions. (n.d.). NPD-Solutions. Retrieved from http://www.npd-solutions.com/proccap.html 10. PMI. (2010). PMP and CAPM Quick Reference. 11. Ross, L., & Rodriguez, H. (2010). API, Inc. 12. Services, C. P. (2010). Project Scope and Change Management. Retrieved from http://www.collegiateproject.com/articles/Preliminary%20Change%20Management%20Plan.pdf 117 | P a g e Keller School of Management- Capstone PM600